Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Make
Kia
Model
Sportage 2wd
L4-2.4L (2011)
Date
1st January 2018
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Horn
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Alarm Horn Relay: Locations
Keyless Entry Module: Recalls Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > BOD070 > Sep
> 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 21
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > BOD070 > Sep
> 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 22
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry
Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
Keyless Entry Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit
Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry
Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 30
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry
Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 31
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 33
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA050 - Audio/Navigation Software
Upgrade
GROUP General
NUMBER 040
This bulletin provides information relating to a limited number of 2011 Sportage (SL) vehicles
equipped with navigation built from the start of production to July 22, 2010 that may exhibit
announcement voice volume that is lower than normal as compared to other modes when pressing
the MAP VOICE BUTTON or the TALK BUTTON in FM/AM mode. To resolve this condition, an
upgrade is available for the Audio/Navigation system via a USB memory stick To properly perform
the software upgrade follow the Service Procedure outlined in the bulletin.
2. Plug the upgrade USB memory stick into the USB port as indicated by the arrow.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: >
GEN040 > Aug > 10 > Campaign SA050 - Audio/Navigation Software Upgrade > Page 44
3. Briefly press "SETUP" button as indicated in step 1 image then touch Main button on the screen.
4. Touch "System Info" button on the screen.
5. Touch "Map Upgrade" button then pop-up dialog box will verify start of update.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: >
GEN040 > Aug > 10 > Campaign SA050 - Audio/Navigation Software Upgrade > Page 45
6. Touch "Yes" button on the screen.
7. Photo shows the upgrade in progress.
When upgrade is completed the screen will flash On then Off (blank screen) Press "POWER"
button to reboot the system.
Make sure the thumb-drive is removed from USB port when upgrade is completed.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: >
GEN040 > Aug > 10 > Campaign SA050 - Audio/Navigation Software Upgrade > Page 46
REQUIRED PART:
GROUP General
NUMBER 040
This bulletin provides information relating to a limited number of 2011 Sportage (SL) vehicles
equipped with navigation built from the start of production to July 22, 2010 that may exhibit
announcement voice volume that is lower than normal as compared to other modes when pressing
the MAP VOICE BUTTON or the TALK BUTTON in FM/AM mode. To resolve this condition, an
upgrade is available for the Audio/Navigation system via a USB memory stick To properly perform
the software upgrade follow the Service Procedure outlined in the bulletin.
2. Plug the upgrade USB memory stick into the USB port as indicated by the arrow.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > GEN040 > Aug > 10 >
Campaign SA050 - Audio/Navigation Software Upgrade > Page 52
3. Briefly press "SETUP" button as indicated in step 1 image then touch Main button on the screen.
4. Touch "System Info" button on the screen.
5. Touch "Map Upgrade" button then pop-up dialog box will verify start of update.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > GEN040 > Aug > 10 >
Campaign SA050 - Audio/Navigation Software Upgrade > Page 53
6. Touch "Yes" button on the screen.
7. Photo shows the upgrade in progress.
When upgrade is completed the screen will flash On then Off (blank screen) Press "POWER"
button to reboot the system.
Make sure the thumb-drive is removed from USB port when upgrade is completed.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > GEN040 > Aug > 10 >
Campaign SA050 - Audio/Navigation Software Upgrade > Page 54
REQUIRED PART:
Keyless Entry Module: Recalls Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R)
Unit Software Update > Page 65
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R)
Unit Software Update > Page 66
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign
SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
Keyless Entry Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit
Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign
SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 74
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign
SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 75
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: >
TT2008090502 > Sep > 08 > Brake System - Brake Noise
Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brake System - Brake Noise
Number KT2008090502
Area N.America
- Description
Some vehicles may experience a squeaking or grinding noise originating from the front or rear disc
brakes when applying the brake. The concern maybe related to the brake pads sticking and not
moving freely in the slides due to lack of lubrication one/or corrosion. To address this concern
remove, clean and lubricate the brake pad contact area as shown in the article.
^ Clamp mounting bracket into vice and clean the rust and/or corrosion using a wire brush
^ Lubricate the cleaned areas with CRC(R) Synthetic Brake Caliper Grease
CAUTION:
If grease gets on the pad friction material or rotor it must be cleaned before road-testing the
vehicle.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: >
TT2008090502 > Sep > 08 > Brake System - Brake Noise > Page 82
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: >
TT2008090502 > Sep > 08 > Brake System - Brake Noise > Page 88
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 89
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan (High) Relay
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan (High) Relay > Page 117
E/R Fuse & Relay Box View
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan (High) Relay > Page 118
E/R Fuse & Relay Box View
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan (High) Relay > Page 119
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan (Low) Relay
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay
> Component Information > Diagrams > Cooling Fan (High) Relay
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Cooling Fan (High) Relay
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Cooling Fan (Low) Relay
EMS Box
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > System Relay, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Page 144
EMS Box View
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Brake Lamp Relay: Locations
M13-A BCM
M13-B BCM
M13-C BCM
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304
Engine Control Module: Recalls Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 091[Rev 1]
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: ECM UPGRADE - MIL ON WITH DTC P0300 - P0304 LOGIC
(SA070)
*NOTICE
This bulletin provides information related to the ECM software upgrade of some 2011MY Sportage
(SL) 2.4L vehicles produced from start of production to December 20, 2010 which may experience
a Malfunction Indicator Lamp illuminated with the ECM (Electronic Control Module) system-related
DTC P0300-P0304.
Please perform this Service Action for all dealer in-stock units prior to retail sales. For confirmation
that the latest reflash has been performed to a vehicle you are working on, verify ROM ID using the
tables in this TSB.
To correct this condition, the ECM should be reprogrammed using GDS download as described
below.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 191
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 192
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 193
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 194
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 195
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
SA070 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For
MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For
MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 091[Rev 1]
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: ECM UPGRADE - MIL ON WITH DTC P0300 - P0304 LOGIC
(SA070)
*NOTICE
This bulletin provides information related to the ECM software upgrade of some 2011MY Sportage
(SL) 2.4L vehicles produced from start of production to December 20, 2010 which may experience
a Malfunction Indicator Lamp illuminated with the ECM (Electronic Control Module) system-related
DTC P0300-P0304.
Please perform this Service Action for all dealer in-stock units prior to retail sales. For confirmation
that the latest reflash has been performed to a vehicle you are working on, verify ROM ID using the
tables in this TSB.
To correct this condition, the ECM should be reprogrammed using GDS download as described
below.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For
MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 201
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For
MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 202
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For
MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 203
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For
MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 204
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For
MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 205
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
SA070 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 090
This bulletin provides information related to extracting "In use performance tracking" missions data
from the engine control unit (ECU) in certain vehicles sold in California. The California Air Resource
Board (GARB) requires this emissions data to be extracted from the ECUs of a number of
customer owned 2011 model year vehicles with a minimum of 3000 accumulated miles without
reprogramming or resetting. To facilitate collection of this data at the dealer level, changes to the
GDS have been made so that screen shots will allow the capture of relevant parameters.
*NOTICE
This data collection does not apply to vehicles or dealers operating outside of California.
*NOTICE
IF THE VEHICLE MEETS THE CRITERIA BELOW, CALIFORNIA DEALERS MUST PERFORM
THIS DATA COLLECTION ON VEHICLES WHENEVER AN AFFECTED VEHICLE IS IN THE
SHOP FOR ANY MAINTENANCE OR REPAIRS.
For vehicles listed on DCS as requiring this procedure, follow the instructions in this bulletin after
confirming that the following criteria are met:
^ WebDCS shows this as an open Data Collection code DC002A-B (depending on model) for the
vehicle.
^ Vehicle repair history does not show battery replacement/disconnection/reset or an ECU Update
done in the last 3000 miles, because IUMPR data
CAUTION
If vehicle meets above criteria, collect data prior to any other campaign or repair-related activities.
Service Procedure:
1. Open the engine compartment and locate the emission label under the hood. Locate and write
down the "Group" number found on the label for later
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 210
form entry.
2. To start use the Global Diagnostic System (GDS). Begin by clicking on "ID Register". Click on
"Auto VIN" or manually enter vehicle information on the next screen.
*NOTICE
3. Choose "Engine" under "Select System". Click "OK" and follow screen instructions for
connecting to vehicle.
4. To verify the VIN, select "Read VIN" under the "Vehicle S/W Management" menu. Click "OK"
and write down the VIN for later form entry.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 211
5a. Select "System Identification".
5b. Write down the "Calibration ID" or "ROM ID" number for later form entry. Next go to the main
screen by clicking on the "GDS" logo at the top left of the screen.
*NOTICE
If all values indicate "Not Supported" or "0", check to make sure you have GDS software version
N-K-01-07-0010 or later. If the software version is correct, and all values show "Not Supported" or
"0", the vehicle will not qualify for this data collection, as it may have received a recent ECM
Update or battery replacement/reset of the data values.
*NOTICE
Make sure you capture the entire screen, if only part of the list is displayed, first click "Expand"
button, then proceed to capture the entire screen.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 213
9. Select "Scantool Area - Full" and click "Send to file". The GDS will set up a designation folder
and file name to save the captured data. Please change the file name to include the model/engine,
the last 6 of the VIN and the date (mmddyyyy). Before saving, write down the file name and
designation folder for further reference.
Example
10. After saving the file, return to the GDS home page by clicking on "GDS" logo in the upper left
hand corner.
^ Type "Group:" followed by the group number from the Vehicle Emission Control Information label
in step 1.
^ Add RO#.
*NOTICE
Please check to ensure both group and Cal ID numbers are correctly entered.
13. To attach the data to the feedback form, click on the "Browse" button.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 215
14. Refer to the file name and destination from step 9.
^ Navigate to: Local Disk (D:) / gvciData / Record /
^ Once the file name appears in the "File Name" box, click on the "Open" button.
15. When the file name appears in the attachment field and all the information has been entered,
click the "Submit" button.
*NOTICE
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 216
*NOTICE
You may also print the data prior to submitting as record to attach to the RO.
*NOTICE
VIN inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
DC002 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 090
This bulletin provides information related to extracting "In use performance tracking" missions data
from the engine control unit (ECU) in certain vehicles sold in California. The California Air Resource
Board (GARB) requires this emissions data to be extracted from the ECUs of a number of
customer owned 2011 model year vehicles with a minimum of 3000 accumulated miles without
reprogramming or resetting. To facilitate collection of this data at the dealer level, changes to the
GDS have been made so that screen shots will allow the capture of relevant parameters.
*NOTICE
This data collection does not apply to vehicles or dealers operating outside of California.
*NOTICE
IF THE VEHICLE MEETS THE CRITERIA BELOW, CALIFORNIA DEALERS MUST PERFORM
THIS DATA COLLECTION ON VEHICLES WHENEVER AN AFFECTED VEHICLE IS IN THE
SHOP FOR ANY MAINTENANCE OR REPAIRS.
For vehicles listed on DCS as requiring this procedure, follow the instructions in this bulletin after
confirming that the following criteria are met:
^ WebDCS shows this as an open Data Collection code DC002A-B (depending on model) for the
vehicle.
^ Vehicle repair history does not show battery replacement/disconnection/reset or an ECU Update
done in the last 3000 miles, because IUMPR data
CAUTION
If vehicle meets above criteria, collect data prior to any other campaign or repair-related activities.
Service Procedure:
1. Open the engine compartment and locate the emission label under the hood. Locate and write
down the "Group" number found on the label for later
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 222
form entry.
2. To start use the Global Diagnostic System (GDS). Begin by clicking on "ID Register". Click on
"Auto VIN" or manually enter vehicle information on the next screen.
*NOTICE
3. Choose "Engine" under "Select System". Click "OK" and follow screen instructions for
connecting to vehicle.
4. To verify the VIN, select "Read VIN" under the "Vehicle S/W Management" menu. Click "OK"
and write down the VIN for later form entry.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 223
5a. Select "System Identification".
5b. Write down the "Calibration ID" or "ROM ID" number for later form entry. Next go to the main
screen by clicking on the "GDS" logo at the top left of the screen.
*NOTICE
If all values indicate "Not Supported" or "0", check to make sure you have GDS software version
N-K-01-07-0010 or later. If the software version is correct, and all values show "Not Supported" or
"0", the vehicle will not qualify for this data collection, as it may have received a recent ECM
Update or battery replacement/reset of the data values.
*NOTICE
Make sure you capture the entire screen, if only part of the list is displayed, first click "Expand"
button, then proceed to capture the entire screen.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 225
9. Select "Scantool Area - Full" and click "Send to file". The GDS will set up a designation folder
and file name to save the captured data. Please change the file name to include the model/engine,
the last 6 of the VIN and the date (mmddyyyy). Before saving, write down the file name and
designation folder for further reference.
Example
10. After saving the file, return to the GDS home page by clicking on "GDS" logo in the upper left
hand corner.
^ Type "Group:" followed by the group number from the Vehicle Emission Control Information label
in step 1.
^ Add RO#.
*NOTICE
Please check to ensure both group and Cal ID numbers are correctly entered.
13. To attach the data to the feedback form, click on the "Browse" button.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 227
14. Refer to the file name and destination from step 9.
^ Navigate to: Local Disk (D:) / gvciData / Record /
^ Once the file name appears in the "File Name" box, click on the "Open" button.
15. When the file name appears in the attachment field and all the information has been entered,
click the "Submit" button.
*NOTICE
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 228
*NOTICE
You may also print the data prior to submitting as record to attach to the RO.
*NOTICE
VIN inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
DC002 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
229
STACK:
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Keyless Start Control Module: Recalls Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Start Control Module: > BOD070 >
Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 263
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Start Control Module: > BOD070 >
Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 264
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Start Control
Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
Keyless Start Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R)
Unit Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Start Control
Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 272
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Start Control
Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 273
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Keyless Start Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 277
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 279
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 280
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 281
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 282
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 283
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 284
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 286
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 287
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 288
Keyless Start Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by SD number (i.e SD130-4, etc.) within these diagrams can
be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be
found via the photo number at the vehicle level under Locations by Photo Number. See:
Locations/Component Locations
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Neutral Start Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Rear Parking Assist Sensor Center LH
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Rear Parking Assist Sensor Center RH
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type) > Page 420
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Brake Switch (Hand Type)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Foot Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type)
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Foot Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type)
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Hand Parking Brake Switch (Hand Type)
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type) > Page 491
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Brake Switch (Hand Type)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Foot Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type)
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Foot Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type)
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Hand Parking Brake Switch (Hand Type)
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 538
Number KT2008090302
Area N.America
- Description
KMA has found in some cases that the Accelerator Position Sensor (APS) as part of the
accelerator pedal assembly is being replaced unneccessarily for DTC P2135. P2135 is the code for
the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) which is part of the Electronic Throttle Control Actuator (ETC).
Should a problem occur with the Accelerator Position Sensor (APS), DTC P2138 would be set, not
P2135.
Some confusion may occur when viewing the GDS/KGIS descriptor for P2135 and P2138, both of
which have similar wording - Throttle/pedal Position Sensor Switch Correlation. KMA is actively
working to have this corrected in future GDS/KGIS releases. Until that time, please be aware the
DTC P2135 relates to the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) and DTC 2138 relates to the Accelerator
position Sensor (APS) respectively.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 549
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 604
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 606
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 607
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 608
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 609
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 610
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 611
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 613
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 614
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 615
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
SD436-1 Vehicle Speed System (1)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 616
SD436-2 Vehicle Speed System (2)
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by SD number (i.e SD130-4, etc.) within these diagrams can
be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be
found via the photo number at the vehicle level under Locations by Photo Number. See:
Locations/Component Locations
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Engine Management DTCs P2135 and P2138
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Engine
Management DTCs P2135 and P2138
Model All Model
Number KT2008090302
Area N.America
- Description
KMA has found in some cases that the Accelerator Position Sensor (APS) as part of the
accelerator pedal assembly is being replaced unneccessarily for DTC P2135. P2135 is the code for
the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) which is part of the Electronic Throttle Control Actuator (ETC).
Should a problem occur with the Accelerator Position Sensor (APS), DTC P2138 would be set, not
P2135.
Some confusion may occur when viewing the GDS/KGIS descriptor for P2135 and P2138, both of
which have similar wording - Throttle/pedal Position Sensor Switch Correlation. KMA is actively
working to have this corrected in future GDS/KGIS releases. Until that time, please be aware the
DTC P2135 relates to the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) and DTC 2138 relates to the Accelerator
position Sensor (APS) respectively.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 622
Ignition Switch: Diagrams Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch (W/O Smart Key)
M09 Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch (W/O Smart Key)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning
Switch (W/O Smart Key) > Page 646
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Driver Curtain Air Bag (With Rollover Sensor)
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Page 676
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Ignition Switch: Diagrams Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch (W/O Smart Key)
M09 Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch (W/O Smart Key)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch (W/O Smart Key) > Page 704
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line
TPMS
Number KT2008092302
Area N.America
- Description
Diagnosing TRW/Lear Low Line Tire Pressure Monitoring warning light ON conditions with certain
Diagnostic Trouble Codes stored in Memory requires particular attention. The following procedure
can assist in proper diagnosis for the wheel sensor concerns.
^ Install TPMS tool to diagnose DTC's, retrieve DTC C1313, C1312, etc.
^ Using the worksheet record sensor ID for all Four (4) Sensors from the "Current data" Screen.
^ Ping each wheel and record these sensor ID's on the worksheet.
^ Match wheel sensor ID, against the ID recorded from the exciter tool/ECU. The missing sensor ID
should be checked for correct setting and battery
DO NOT replace or diagnose components in a position based on the DTC information. Always
locate the sensor ID on the vehicle with the hand-tool. A commen mistake is Code C1312 is set
and the technical replaces that sensor thinking it was in the left Front, the wheel and tire may be
located in the Right Rear. When and it the tires are rotated the original configuration is no longer
valid.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor
System - Diagnosing Low Line TPMS > Page 715
TPMS Wheel Sensor Worksheet
^ If the Lamp shown above is ON: Check tire pressure and check for causes of low pressure.
^ Verify wheel sensor ID's in the ECU module corresponds to all 4 sensors on the vehicle - if not,
reprogram the sensors on the vehicle into the ECU
module.
^ Verify that the ECU module and all 4 wheel sensors have the mode and state configured correctly
- if not, correct this condition first. - This applies to
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor
System - Diagnosing Low Line TPMS > Page 716
^ Excessive aftermarket wiring tie-wrapped and coiled on or near TPMS module. This may create a
magnetic field causing concern.
^ If all wheel sensor ID's, Mode and State are correct as initially received and you cannot identify
any interfearence as listed above and the problem
Wheel sensor to ECU communication takes place every 3 minutes, 20 seconds for TRW systems
and every 3 minutes for Lear systems unless rapid tire deflation is occuring. Be sure to wait this
amount of time for the values to populate on the Current Data Screen.
ROAD TEST:
To verify your repair drive the vehicle at or above 20 MPH for 20 minutes, if speed goes below 20
MPH during Auto-Learn (TRW only), the process is halted until speed is above threshold again.
Auto-Learn (TRW only), is not recommended, use exciter tool each time to program the sensor ID's
into the receiver module.
The warning light shown above = indicates Low tire pressure problem, use exciter tool and match
tire pressure on-screen value against your tire pressure gauge reading. The tire pressures should
be set COLD.
The warning light shown above = indicates a problem with the Wheel sensors, TPMS module, radio
frequency interfearence or related wiring. Use Exciter too to diagnose.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor
System - Diagnosing Low Line TPMS > Page 718
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Outside Radio Signals
Affects TPMS
Number KT2008092201
Area N.America
- Description
KMA has received several inquires reguarding TPMS light ON with or without Stored Diagnostic
Trouble Codes in Memory. The following listed components/conditions may cause the control unit
and wheel sensor communication to be interrupted and may cause multiple DTC's.
NOTE:
Always use the correct part for the proper model year and production range, failure to do so may
result in vehicles which are difficult to repair and can be subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Excessive aftermarket wiring tie-wrapped and coiled on or near TPMS module. This may create a
magnetic field causing concern.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
Power Window Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Driver's Power Window Switch
Replacement
GROUP Service Campaign
NUMBER SC086
This bulletin provides information relating to some LX Sportage vehicles equipped with "Auto
Down" function and produced from the start of production through October 27, 2010. In affected
vehicles the window may not raise or lower even though the power window switch is actuated. To
correct this condition and improve customer satisfaction Kia is launching this Service Campaign
and replacing the power window switch module assembly on all affected 2011 Sportage vehicles
that fall within the vehicle production range Kia is requesting the completion of this Service
Campaign on all affected 2011 MY Sportage vehicles in dealer stock prior to retail sales.
*NOTICE
WebDCS must be checked to confirm that SC086 has not been previously done on any vehicle
without a campaign completion label. WebDCS > Warranty Coverage > Warranty Coverage Inquiry
> Check Open Campaign Status
To assure complete customer satisfaction remember to check for any additional open campaigns
before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Inspection Procedure:
Open the hood and check for SC086 campaign completion label above the drivers side fuse box If
label exists NO FURTHER ACTION IS REQUIRED
If label does not exist continue to step one (1) of Service Procedure outlined below.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Window Switch: > SC086
> Nov > 10 > Campaign - Driver's Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 734
Service Procedure:
1. Remove the drivers door quadrant interior cover (A).
Remove the interior handle cover (B), and then the three (3) door trim mounting screws including
the screw.
*NOTICE
The locations of the screws are indicated by the larger arrows, including the screw behind the
interior handle cover (B).
2. Disconnect the interior handle cage; then disconnect tweeter speaker and power window
connector from the door trim; then remove the door trim.
3. Remove the six (6) power window switch mounting screws (circles), and then remove the power
window switch module assembly from the door trim as shown in the photo.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Window Switch: > SC086
> Nov > 10 > Campaign - Driver's Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 735
4. Unsnap the locking tabs that secure the power window switch module assembly (C) to the power
window switch case (D), and then separate the module assembly from the case.
5. Replace the power window switch module assembly (C) with an new improved assembly into
switch case (D)
Test power window switch operation several times before releasing vehicle.
6. Attach campaign completion label above the driver's side fuse box.
REQUIRED PARTS
*NOTICE
*NOTICE
WebDCS must be checked to confirm that SC086 has not been previously performed on any
vehicle without a campaign completion label. WebDCS > Warranty Coverage > Warranty Coverage
Inquiry > Check Open Campaign Status
To assure complete customer satisfaction, remember to check for any additional open campaigns
before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Window Switch: > SC086 > Nov > 10 >
Campaign - Driver's Power Window Switch Replacement
Power Window Switch: Recalls Campaign - Driver's Power Window Switch Replacement
GROUP Service Campaign
NUMBER SC086
This bulletin provides information relating to some LX Sportage vehicles equipped with "Auto
Down" function and produced from the start of production through October 27, 2010. In affected
vehicles the window may not raise or lower even though the power window switch is actuated. To
correct this condition and improve customer satisfaction Kia is launching this Service Campaign
and replacing the power window switch module assembly on all affected 2011 Sportage vehicles
that fall within the vehicle production range Kia is requesting the completion of this Service
Campaign on all affected 2011 MY Sportage vehicles in dealer stock prior to retail sales.
*NOTICE
WebDCS must be checked to confirm that SC086 has not been previously done on any vehicle
without a campaign completion label. WebDCS > Warranty Coverage > Warranty Coverage Inquiry
> Check Open Campaign Status
To assure complete customer satisfaction remember to check for any additional open campaigns
before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Inspection Procedure:
Open the hood and check for SC086 campaign completion label above the drivers side fuse box If
label exists NO FURTHER ACTION IS REQUIRED
If label does not exist continue to step one (1) of Service Procedure outlined below.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Window Switch: > SC086 > Nov > 10 >
Campaign - Driver's Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 742
Service Procedure:
1. Remove the drivers door quadrant interior cover (A).
Remove the interior handle cover (B), and then the three (3) door trim mounting screws including
the screw.
*NOTICE
The locations of the screws are indicated by the larger arrows, including the screw behind the
interior handle cover (B).
2. Disconnect the interior handle cage; then disconnect tweeter speaker and power window
connector from the door trim; then remove the door trim.
3. Remove the six (6) power window switch mounting screws (circles), and then remove the power
window switch module assembly from the door trim as shown in the photo.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Window Switch: > SC086 > Nov > 10 >
Campaign - Driver's Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 743
4. Unsnap the locking tabs that secure the power window switch module assembly (C) to the power
window switch case (D), and then separate the module assembly from the case.
5. Replace the power window switch module assembly (C) with an new improved assembly into
switch case (D)
Test power window switch operation several times before releasing vehicle.
6. Attach campaign completion label above the driver's side fuse box.
REQUIRED PARTS
*NOTICE
*NOTICE
WebDCS must be checked to confirm that SC086 has not been previously performed on any
vehicle without a campaign completion label. WebDCS > Warranty Coverage > Warranty Coverage
Inquiry > Check Open Campaign Status
To assure complete customer satisfaction, remember to check for any additional open campaigns
before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Power Window Main Switch
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Passenger Power Window Switch (W/O Central Door Lock)
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Passenger Power Window Switch (With Central Door Lock)
GROUP Chassis
NUMBER 032
MODEL ALL
SUBJECT:
This bulletin provides 2011 model year alignment specifications as well as diagnosis and best
practices tips.
2. Alignment Basics
IMPORTANT:
^ Before and after alignment print outs are required to be submitted with all vehicle drift or pull
warranty alignment claims.
^ Before performing an alignment, check to ensure all tires are set to the specified pressure.
^ Ensure the vehicle is carrying a typical load (not heavily loaded, which will alter alignment once
the load is removed or changed).
^ Optima (IF), Sportage (SL) and Forte (ID) vehicles are equipped with electric power steering
(MDPS - Motor Driven Power Steering). Perform an absolute steering position (ASP) calibration
using GDS after the alignment is completed.
^ Refer to the following alignment specifications or KGIS for 2011 model year specifications.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 774
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 775
Alignment Specifications:
CAMBER:
Camber is the inclination of the centerline of the wheel from the vertical as viewed from the front of
the vehicle. The camber angle will affect the wear on the inner or outer edge of the tire.
A tire with positive camber can influence the vehicle with a directional pull. The vehicle will go
towards the side that has the tire with the most positive
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 776
camber.
CASTER:
Caster is the angle between an imaginary line drawn through the upper and lower steering pivots
and a line perpendicular to the road surface (viewed from side of vehicle).
If the top of the line tilts rearward, the vehicle is said to have "POSITIVE" caster.
If the top of the line tilts forward, the vehicle is said to have "NEGATIVE" caster.
Caster will not cause tire wear unless extreme maladjustment or worn parts are involved.
TOE:
Toe is the difference between the leading edge (or front) and trailing edge (or rear) of the tires.
Toe-in is the measurement in fractions of an inch millimeters or decimal of degrees that the tires
are closer together in the front than they are in the back.
Toe-out is the same measurement, except the tires are further apart in the front than in the rear.
Vehicle drift or pull can be attributed to several factors. Understanding what can affect it is
imperative for anyone repairing a vehicle with a drift or pull condition. Most of these factors are
directly measureable using tools commonly found in any repair shop like tire pressure gauges,
alignment racks, and wheel balancers.
1. Air pressure - Low or uneven tire pressure can cause a vehicle to drift or pull towards that tire
with the lowest pressure. Remember that cold tires
register slightly lower pressure than tires that are warm from usage. Ensure that all tires are
correctly inflated.
2. Alignment
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 777
a. Camber - A vehicle will drift or pull towards the side with more positive front camber. Camber
difference between the front tires greater than 0.5
b. Caster - A vehicle will drift or pull towards the side with the least positive caster.
c. Steering Axis Inclination (SAI) - The angle formed by the line drawn through the steering pivot
axis and a line at true vertical when viewed from
the front of the vehicle. SAI is designed into a vehicle's suspension and aids straight-line stability.
This angle can be measured by the alignment machine. For Hunter units, it is measured during the
caster sweep process. It is useful for checking for damaged components when the SAI difference
between left and right sides is more than 1 degree. If SAI is lower on one side of the vehicle it may
indicate a bent lower control arm. If SAI is higher on one side of the vehicle it may indicate damage
to the upper strut mount.
d. Thrust angle - This is the direction the rear axle is pointing as a result of the rear toe angles and
results in the steering wheel being off-center. To
avoid this situation, rear camber and toe should be adjusted before the front when performing a
four wheel alignment. After the rear is set, center the steering wheel, lock it in place, then adjust the
front camber, caster, and toe (if applicable).
3. Tires - Tires can have significant effect on vehicle drift or pull for the following reasons:
a. Ply steer - Ply steer is an inherent characteristic in a tire which results in a lateral force as the tire
rolls. Rotating the tires from side to side may aid
in cancelling out the effects of ply steer and can aid in diagnosing a ply steer concern.
b. Conicity - Tire conicity refers to the shape of the tire and how cone shaped it is. This can
influence vehicle drift or pull. Conicity can be present in
a new tire due to manufacturing, or in a used tire due to camber wear. Rotating tires may reduce a
vehicle pull concern due to tire conicity.
4. Road Crown - Road Crown is the slope of a road surface to ensure proper drainage. Excessive
Road Crown can cause a vehicle to drift to the low
5. Cross Wind - Excessive cross winds can cause a vehicle to pull or drift. If the Winds are
excessive it can skew the test results.
Other issues can cause vehicle drift or pull, such as brake drag, spring sag resulting in ride height
differences, cargo load/weight distribution, and more. It is important to consider all potential effects
when diagnosing and confirming a vehicle drift or pull condition. Understanding the factors that
affect vehicle drift or pull can help to determine the root cause.
1. Before test driving, verify that all tires are OE, correctly installed (directional tires) and set to the
correct inflation pressure.
3. Two passes should be made to validate the concern at different speeds. Approach the test road
section and drive through at 40 and at 50 MPH.
Center the steering wheel, then slightly turn (~3 degrees) steering wheel to the left and to the right
to get a feel for centeredness. Hold the steering wheel with a light touch on center.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 779
4. Note the direction towards which the vehicle has a tendency to drift or pull. If the vehicle tends to
go left, place the vehicle on the right side of the
lane. If the vehicle tends to go right, place the vehicle on the left side of lane, as shown.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 780
5. Take two time measurements. First, time how long it takes for the vehicle to move from one
edge to the other edge (case 1), as shown. Second, time
how long it takes for the vehicle to move across one complete lane (case 2), as shown. Use the
conditions in the table below to confirm drifting or pulling condition.
2. Ensure the lift is level so vehicle's suspension and steering are in a neutral position.
3. Set the target levels before rolling compensation. After completing the compensation, do not
re-level the targets.
4. Roll the vehicle by turning the left rear tire. This will not disturb the vehicle's suspension and
steering systems. Do not roll the vehicle by pushing or
5. Ensure the pins are in the slip plates, and the Turnplate Bridge is flush with the rolling surface to
minimize the vehicle's suspension movement.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 782
Slip Plates - The slip plates of a Hunter alignment rack are designed to move smoothly and freely
to provide accurate measurements. Before pulling a vehicle onto the rack, check that they move
freely and do not bind. Periodically clean the area underneath the slip plates by blowing
compressed air through to remove any debris. If this does not free a binding plate, contact your
local Hunter representative for cleaning and lubrication recommendations.
StraightTrak LFM feature (Road Force Balance) - StraightTrak (Road Force Balance) is an optional
feature for Hunter's GSP9700 wheel balancer. This feature measures lateral force of a tire due to
ply steer, conicity, and other issues which may contribute to vehicle drift or pull. This can be a
useful tool for vehicles with multiple conditions.
Use StraightTrak (Road Force Balance) to arrange the 4 wheel/tire assemblies of a vehicle in a
configuration which will result in the lowest drifting or pulling force by doing the following:
2. Balance the front left assembly on the Hunter GSP97OO with StraightTrak feature. An icon
located in the lower right corner will show whether or
3. After balancing, press the tire tag button to assign a number to that assembly. Label the
assembly accordingly with a tag or chalk mark.
4. Continue to balance and tag all four assemblies. After all are completed, the screen will show
how different placement positioning of the assemblies
will affect vehicle drift or pull or vibration. Select "Show Least Pull."
5. The arrow on the top of the screen indicates how much drift or pulling force exists with the tires
in that configuration. Install the wheel/tire
assemblies to those positions on the vehicle to achieve the least amount of tire-induced drift or pull.
- Tag or mark vacuum hoses before disconnecting them. After completing a job, double check that
the vacuum hoses are properly connected.
- To disconnect vacuum hoses, pull on the end, not the middle of the hose.
- To pull apart electrical connectors, pull on the connector itself, not the wires.
- Before disconnecting pressurized fuel lines, always perform Fuel Pressure Release procedure in
order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury.
- When replacing fuel filters, always check all affected lines and fittings for leaks.
- Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or
explosion.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils.
- Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be
cleaned regularly.
- First Aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds.
- Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the
skin.
- Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help).
Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed.
- Do not use gasoline, kerosine, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinner or solvents for cleaning skin.
- Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical
goggles or face shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided.
WARNING: Brake fluid may be irritating to the skin or eyes. In case of contact, take the following
actions:
SERVICE PRECAUTIONS
After servicing a hose, check for leaks before and after test driving the vehicle.
- Always use the correct size hose. Do not use standard sized hose in place of metric hose or vice
versa.
Always use the correct type of hose. Never use vacuum hose in place of fuel hose. Never use
heater hose in place of PCV hose.
- When replacing hoses which are attached to the engine on one end and the frame or body on the
other end, always leave sufficient length to compensate for engine movement (from torque).
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Engine/A/T - Flushing Systems Not Recommended
Brake Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/A/T - Flushing Systems Not Recommended
Number KT2008082501
Area N.America
- Description
Vehicles produced by Kia Motors Corporation do not require the Engine, Transmission, "Power
Steering and Cooling System to be power flushed. Kia vehicles are designed to give thousands of
miles of trouble free service if all recommended maintenance intervals are followed by the
customer with a simple drain and refill. The use of fluid flush exchangers is not required nor
recommended by Kia.
^ Flush systems add unnecessary maintenance expense not required by the manufacture to
maintain the warranty.
^ Flush systems can leave behind solvents and residue which can degrade the new replaced
lubricant, also can degrade the seals and gaskets
intervals.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Engine/A/T - Flushing Systems Not Recommended > Page 800
ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: begin
STACK:
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Page 801
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Brake Fluid
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................... DOT 3 or DOT 4
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Clutch Fluid: Specifications
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
............. FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4 Brake Fluid
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Engine/A/T - Flushing Systems Not Recommended
Number KT2008082501
Area N.America
- Description
Vehicles produced by Kia Motors Corporation do not require the Engine, Transmission, "Power
Steering and Cooling System to be power flushed. Kia vehicles are designed to give thousands of
miles of trouble free service if all recommended maintenance intervals are followed by the
customer with a simple drain and refill. The use of fluid flush exchangers is not required nor
recommended by Kia.
^ Flush systems add unnecessary maintenance expense not required by the manufacture to
maintain the warranty.
^ Flush systems can leave behind solvents and residue which can degrade the new replaced
lubricant, also can degrade the seals and gaskets
intervals.
* Kia does recommend flushing the oil cooler during A/T replacement, refer to the appropriate
Transmission TSB.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
A/T .......................................................................................................................................................
............................................................ 7.19 qt (6.8L) M/T ...................................................................
............................................................................................................................................... 7.08 qt
(6.7L)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 811
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Coolant
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
........... Ethylene glycol base for aluminium radiators.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T -
Proper Checking of A/T Fluid Level
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Proper Checking of A/T Fluid Level
Number KT2009043001
Area N.America
- Description
The automatic transmission level should be checked regularly. Keep the vehicle on level ground
with the parking brake.
1. Make sure the transmission fluid temperature is between 158-176°F, use scan tool/GDS to verify
temperature if needed. Checking the fluid level before it has reached operating temperature will
result in false readings. Warm-up time can vary depending on ambient temperature - see sample
graph below.
2. Place the selector lever in P (Park) or N (Neutral) and engine is at idle speed.
3. Confirm the fluid level is in the "HOT" range on the dipstick. If the fluid level is lower, add the
specified fluid as required.
> Normal warm-up time can vary depending on the ambient temperature
> Graph shown is for vehicle in 95°F ambient temperature idling in Park for 30 minutes and finally
reaching the proper temperature to check the fluid level, driving the vehicle for 10-15 minutes will
decrease time to proper temperature
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T -
Proper Checking of A/T Fluid Level > Page 816
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/A/T - Flushing Systems Not Recommended
Number KT2008082501
Area N.America
- Description
Vehicles produced by Kia Motors Corporation do not require the Engine, Transmission, "Power
Steering and Cooling System to be power flushed. Kia vehicles are designed to give thousands of
miles of trouble free service if all recommended maintenance intervals are followed by the
customer with a simple drain and refill. The use of fluid flush exchangers is not required nor
recommended by Kia.
^ Flush systems add unnecessary maintenance expense not required by the manufacture to
maintain the warranty.
^ Flush systems can leave behind solvents and residue which can degrade the new replaced
lubricant, also can degrade the seals and gaskets
intervals.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T -
Proper Checking of A/T Fluid Level > Page 817
ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: begin
STACK:
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
............................................................ 7.50 qt (7.1L)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 820
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Type ............ Michang ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV, NOCA ATF SP-IV, KIA Genuine ATF SP-IV or
other brands meting the specification approved by
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
............................................................ 1.90 qt (1.8L)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 825
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
........................................... API GL-4, SAE 75W/85
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Engine/A/T - Flushing Systems Not Recommended
Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/A/T - Flushing Systems Not Recommended
Number KT2008082501
Area N.America
- Description
Vehicles produced by Kia Motors Corporation do not require the Engine, Transmission, "Power
Steering and Cooling System to be power flushed. Kia vehicles are designed to give thousands of
miles of trouble free service if all recommended maintenance intervals are followed by the
customer with a simple drain and refill. The use of fluid flush exchangers is not required nor
recommended by Kia.
^ Flush systems add unnecessary maintenance expense not required by the manufacture to
maintain the warranty.
^ Flush systems can leave behind solvents and residue which can degrade the new replaced
lubricant, also can degrade the seals and gaskets
intervals.
* Kia does recommend flushing the oil cooler during A/T replacement, refer to the appropriate
Transmission TSB.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
............................................................ 4.86 qt (4.6L)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 832
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Grade ...................................................................................................................................................
................... API Service SM, ILSAC GF-4 or above Viscosity ............................................................
............................................................................................................................................ 5W-20,
5W-30
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Engine/A/T - Flushing Systems Not Recommended
Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/A/T - Flushing Systems Not
Recommended
Number KT2008082501
Area N.America
- Description
Vehicles produced by Kia Motors Corporation do not require the Engine, Transmission, "Power
Steering and Cooling System to be power flushed. Kia vehicles are designed to give thousands of
miles of trouble free service if all recommended maintenance intervals are followed by the
customer with a simple drain and refill. The use of fluid flush exchangers is not required nor
recommended by Kia.
^ Flush systems add unnecessary maintenance expense not required by the manufacture to
maintain the warranty.
^ Flush systems can leave behind solvents and residue which can degrade the new replaced
lubricant, also can degrade the seals and gaskets
intervals.
* Kia does recommend flushing the oil cooler during A/T replacement, refer to the appropriate
Transmission TSB.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 837
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
The EPS (Electric Power Steering) system uses an electric motor to assist the steering force and is
an engine operation independent steering system requiring no fluid.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Electrical - Cell Chargers Blow Fuse to Accessory Socket
Fuse: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Cell Chargers Blow Fuse to Accessory Socket
Number KT2009112001
Area N.America
Subject Fuse For Power Accessory Socket And Cigar Lighter Blown Due To The Use Of
Aftermarket Cellular Chargers Or Similar Plug In Devices
- Description
Fuse For Power Accessory Socket And Cigar Lighter Blown Due To The Use Of Aftermarket
Cellular Chargers Of Similar Plug In Devices
Customers should be advised against the use of some kinds of inexpensive aftermarket cell phone
chargers (or similar plug in devices) due to their use of a removable in-line fuse which causes
susceptibility to haveing small parts detach and short out across the receptacle terminal. If you
incounter a blown fuse for Power Accessory Socket and Cigar Lighter inquire with the customer as
to which brand of cell phone charger etc. they are currently using and advise them to discontinue
the use where applicable. Parching an approved cell phone charger from their cell phone carrier's
Online or retail store should correct this condition.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Electrical - Cell Chargers Blow Fuse to Accessory Socket > Page 843
Fuse: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - New Fuse Design on All Vehicles
Number KT2009060301
Area N.America
- Description
This Pitstop publication advises of the use of new fuse designs (for Kia). Some Kia vehicles have
begun to use lower profile fuses then what's been previously used. They currently are difficult to
find outside of O.E.M. parts suppliers. The fuses are industry categorized as Low Profile Fuses,
and come in various types and amperage ratings.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 844
Fuse: Locations
STACK:
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
PDM Relay Box
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitoring System - Low Pressure
Warning Lamp On
Number KT2009021301
Area N.America
- Description
A recent review of warranty claim data has indicated that many dealers are writing repair orders
and entering unnecessary claims related to normal TPMS system operation. The Tire Pressure
Monitoring System was developed as an important safety feature to alert customers to low air
pressure in one or more of their tires, prompting them to check and adjust their tire pressure at the
nearest service station or other similar facility. Occasionally, due to a customer's lack of familiarity
with the TPMS system and a conditioned response to bring the vehicle in to their serviceing dealer
for any warning lamp concern, you may be presented with a vehicle which has the Tread Lamp
illuminated due to low tire pressure on a normally operating TPMS system. Service advisers and
other dealership personal should screen for all such types of customer complaints and not begin
writing a repair order due to a low tire pressure warning lamp (Tread Lamp) in the absence of any
TPMS Malfunction Indicator Lamp (TPMS Lamp) illuminated. Assist the customer in checking and
adding air to the tires as necessary during their first visit for the low air pressure light on and
provide them with a copy of the tri-fold Kia TPMS Brochure P/N UN050-KU-001.
A warranty claim should not be filed for any complaint related to low tire pressure and may result in
a debit being applied to your dealership during the normal claims review process.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure
Module > Component Information > Locations
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line
TPMS
Number KT2008092302
Area N.America
- Description
Diagnosing TRW/Lear Low Line Tire Pressure Monitoring warning light ON conditions with certain
Diagnostic Trouble Codes stored in Memory requires particular attention. The following procedure
can assist in proper diagnosis for the wheel sensor concerns.
^ Install TPMS tool to diagnose DTC's, retrieve DTC C1313, C1312, etc.
^ Using the worksheet record sensor ID for all Four (4) Sensors from the "Current data" Screen.
^ Ping each wheel and record these sensor ID's on the worksheet.
^ Match wheel sensor ID, against the ID recorded from the exciter tool/ECU. The missing sensor ID
should be checked for correct setting and battery
DO NOT replace or diagnose components in a position based on the DTC information. Always
locate the sensor ID on the vehicle with the hand-tool. A commen mistake is Code C1312 is set
and the technical replaces that sensor thinking it was in the left Front, the wheel and tire may be
located in the Right Rear. When and it the tires are rotated the original configuration is no longer
valid.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line TPMS > Page
894
TPMS Wheel Sensor Worksheet
^ If the Lamp shown above is ON: Check tire pressure and check for causes of low pressure.
^ Verify wheel sensor ID's in the ECU module corresponds to all 4 sensors on the vehicle - if not,
reprogram the sensors on the vehicle into the ECU
module.
^ Verify that the ECU module and all 4 wheel sensors have the mode and state configured correctly
- if not, correct this condition first. - This applies to
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line TPMS > Page
895
^ Excessive aftermarket wiring tie-wrapped and coiled on or near TPMS module. This may create a
magnetic field causing concern.
^ If all wheel sensor ID's, Mode and State are correct as initially received and you cannot identify
any interfearence as listed above and the problem
Wheel sensor to ECU communication takes place every 3 minutes, 20 seconds for TRW systems
and every 3 minutes for Lear systems unless rapid tire deflation is occuring. Be sure to wait this
amount of time for the values to populate on the Current Data Screen.
ROAD TEST:
To verify your repair drive the vehicle at or above 20 MPH for 20 minutes, if speed goes below 20
MPH during Auto-Learn (TRW only), the process is halted until speed is above threshold again.
Auto-Learn (TRW only), is not recommended, use exciter tool each time to program the sensor ID's
into the receiver module.
The warning light shown above = indicates Low tire pressure problem, use exciter tool and match
tire pressure on-screen value against your tire pressure gauge reading. The tire pressures should
be set COLD.
The warning light shown above = indicates a problem with the Wheel sensors, TPMS module, radio
frequency interfearence or related wiring. Use Exciter too to diagnose.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line TPMS > Page
897
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Outside Radio Signals
Affects TPMS
Number KT2008092201
Area N.America
- Description
KMA has received several inquires reguarding TPMS light ON with or without Stored Diagnostic
Trouble Codes in Memory. The following listed components/conditions may cause the control unit
and wheel sensor communication to be interrupted and may cause multiple DTC's.
NOTE:
Always use the correct part for the proper model year and production range, failure to do so may
result in vehicles which are difficult to repair and can be subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Excessive aftermarket wiring tie-wrapped and coiled on or near TPMS module. This may create a
magnetic field causing concern.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitoring System - Low Pressure Warning Lamp On
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitoring System - Low Pressure
Warning Lamp On
Number KT2009021301
Area N.America
- Description
A recent review of warranty claim data has indicated that many dealers are writing repair orders
and entering unnecessary claims related to normal TPMS system operation. The Tire Pressure
Monitoring System was developed as an important safety feature to alert customers to low air
pressure in one or more of their tires, prompting them to check and adjust their tire pressure at the
nearest service station or other similar facility. Occasionally, due to a customer's lack of familiarity
with the TPMS system and a conditioned response to bring the vehicle in to their serviceing dealer
for any warning lamp concern, you may be presented with a vehicle which has the Tread Lamp
illuminated due to low tire pressure on a normally operating TPMS system. Service advisers and
other dealership personal should screen for all such types of customer complaints and not begin
writing a repair order due to a low tire pressure warning lamp (Tread Lamp) in the absence of any
TPMS Malfunction Indicator Lamp (TPMS Lamp) illuminated. Assist the customer in checking and
adding air to the tires as necessary during their first visit for the low air pressure light on and
provide them with a copy of the tri-fold Kia TPMS Brochure P/N UN050-KU-001.
A warranty claim should not be filed for any complaint related to low tire pressure and may result in
a debit being applied to your dealership during the normal claims review process.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component
Information > Locations
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line
TPMS
Number KT2008092302
Area N.America
- Description
Diagnosing TRW/Lear Low Line Tire Pressure Monitoring warning light ON conditions with certain
Diagnostic Trouble Codes stored in Memory requires particular attention. The following procedure
can assist in proper diagnosis for the wheel sensor concerns.
^ Install TPMS tool to diagnose DTC's, retrieve DTC C1313, C1312, etc.
^ Using the worksheet record sensor ID for all Four (4) Sensors from the "Current data" Screen.
^ Ping each wheel and record these sensor ID's on the worksheet.
^ Match wheel sensor ID, against the ID recorded from the exciter tool/ECU. The missing sensor ID
should be checked for correct setting and battery
DO NOT replace or diagnose components in a position based on the DTC information. Always
locate the sensor ID on the vehicle with the hand-tool. A commen mistake is Code C1312 is set
and the technical replaces that sensor thinking it was in the left Front, the wheel and tire may be
located in the Right Rear. When and it the tires are rotated the original configuration is no longer
valid.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line TPMS > Page 911
TPMS Wheel Sensor Worksheet
^ If the Lamp shown above is ON: Check tire pressure and check for causes of low pressure.
^ Verify wheel sensor ID's in the ECU module corresponds to all 4 sensors on the vehicle - if not,
reprogram the sensors on the vehicle into the ECU
module.
^ Verify that the ECU module and all 4 wheel sensors have the mode and state configured correctly
- if not, correct this condition first. - This applies to
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line TPMS > Page 912
^ Excessive aftermarket wiring tie-wrapped and coiled on or near TPMS module. This may create a
magnetic field causing concern.
^ If all wheel sensor ID's, Mode and State are correct as initially received and you cannot identify
any interfearence as listed above and the problem
Wheel sensor to ECU communication takes place every 3 minutes, 20 seconds for TRW systems
and every 3 minutes for Lear systems unless rapid tire deflation is occuring. Be sure to wait this
amount of time for the values to populate on the Current Data Screen.
ROAD TEST:
To verify your repair drive the vehicle at or above 20 MPH for 20 minutes, if speed goes below 20
MPH during Auto-Learn (TRW only), the process is halted until speed is above threshold again.
Auto-Learn (TRW only), is not recommended, use exciter tool each time to program the sensor ID's
into the receiver module.
The warning light shown above = indicates Low tire pressure problem, use exciter tool and match
tire pressure on-screen value against your tire pressure gauge reading. The tire pressures should
be set COLD.
The warning light shown above = indicates a problem with the Wheel sensors, TPMS module, radio
frequency interfearence or related wiring. Use Exciter too to diagnose.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line TPMS > Page 914
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Outside Radio Signals
Affects TPMS
Number KT2008092201
Area N.America
- Description
KMA has received several inquires reguarding TPMS light ON with or without Stored Diagnostic
Trouble Codes in Memory. The following listed components/conditions may cause the control unit
and wheel sensor communication to be interrupted and may cause multiple DTC's.
NOTE:
Always use the correct part for the proper model year and production range, failure to do so may
result in vehicles which are difficult to repair and can be subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Excessive aftermarket wiring tie-wrapped and coiled on or near TPMS module. This may create a
magnetic field causing concern.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Locations
Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/A/T - Flushing Systems Not Recommended
Number KT2008082501
Area N.America
- Description
Vehicles produced by Kia Motors Corporation do not require the Engine, Transmission, "Power
Steering and Cooling System to be power flushed. Kia vehicles are designed to give thousands of
miles of trouble free service if all recommended maintenance intervals are followed by the
customer with a simple drain and refill. The use of fluid flush exchangers is not required nor
recommended by Kia.
^ Flush systems add unnecessary maintenance expense not required by the manufacture to
maintain the warranty.
^ Flush systems can leave behind solvents and residue which can degrade the new replaced
lubricant, also can degrade the seals and gaskets
intervals.
* Kia does recommend flushing the oil cooler during A/T replacement, refer to the appropriate
Transmission TSB.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
............................................................ 4.86 qt (4.6L)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 940
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Grade ...................................................................................................................................................
................... API Service SM, ILSAC GF-4 or above Viscosity ............................................................
............................................................................................................................................ 5W-20,
5W-30
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations
Oil Pump: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Pump Replacement Guidelines
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 084
This bulletin provides guidelines to Engine Oil Pump replacement during Short Block replacement
or internal engine repair.
NOTICE
A new or remanufactured engine sub-assembly (long block) is shipped with a new oil pump already
installed, so this bulletin does not pertain to the installation of new or remanufactured engines.
1. Inspect the incident engine using the Engine Core Data Form included in (TSB: ENG 042); then
proceed to step #2.
NOTICE
Refer to TSB ENG 042 published March 2009 (Remanufactured Engine Program) for details.
Depending on the engine diagnosis results, the repair may not require a short or long block
replacement to resolve the condition.
2. If a short block replacement has been determined as the repair option with any of the following
conditions, then ALWAYS replace the oil pump with a new pump.
^ Excessive foreign/metallic debris found inside the oil pan or the oil pick-up screen.
^ Continuous engine knocking noise (after isolating the accessory drive component such as the
power steering pump, air conditioning compressor, water
pump, or alternator)
^ Engine friction damage such as piston/cylinder wall scuffing, main/rod bearing/journal scuffing,
excessively worn thrust bearing, or seizing of rotating
components.
3. If a short block replacement is not required and none of the existing conditions from step #2
have been found refer to the following inspection points of the engine oil pump prior to reuse.
^ Rotate the oil pump by hand (rotor/sprocket) to confirm that it rotates freely without much
resistance Replace oil pump if internal binding damage is
encountered.
^ Visually inspect the condition of the front main oil seal in the oil pump (engines using a front case
assembly oil pump) for wear damage or visual leaks
Replace the front main oil seal if necessary to ensure a proper seal.
NOTICE
If the front main oil seal is found partially pushed out from the front case assembly, you should
check for excessive crankshaft thrust endplay before replaceing the seal.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Oil Pump Replacement Guidelines > Page 950
^ Visually inspect and clean the Oil Pickup Screen Assembly replace only if damaged.
^ (For engines using front case assembly oil pumps) inspect and re-tighten the machine screw
fasteners of the new oil pump cover if necessary.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Oil Pump Replacement Guidelines > Page 951
^ (For engines using front case assembly oil pumps) inspect the connection between the front case
assembly and the oil screen assembly. Replace the oil
screen gasket if necessary. Re-tighten the bolt fasteners of the oil pickup screen if necessary.
NOTICE
Proper sealing of the oil pump cover and the oil pickup screen to the oil pump front case body is
important to ensure proper oil pressure delivery during engine operation.
WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION: This bulletin provides additional service information during
engine diagnosis and repair. Normal warranty policy will apply.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Locations
- Tag or mark vacuum hoses before disconnecting them. After completing a job, double check that
the vacuum hoses are properly connected.
- To disconnect vacuum hoses, pull on the end, not the middle of the hose.
- To pull apart electrical connectors, pull on the connector itself, not the wires.
- Before disconnecting pressurized fuel lines, always perform Fuel Pressure Release procedure in
order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury.
- When replacing fuel filters, always check all affected lines and fittings for leaks.
- Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or
explosion.
Number KT2008082501
Area N.America
- Description
Vehicles produced by Kia Motors Corporation do not require the Engine, Transmission, "Power
Steering and Cooling System to be power flushed. Kia vehicles are designed to give thousands of
miles of trouble free service if all recommended maintenance intervals are followed by the
customer with a simple drain and refill. The use of fluid flush exchangers is not required nor
recommended by Kia.
^ Flush systems add unnecessary maintenance expense not required by the manufacture to
maintain the warranty.
^ Flush systems can leave behind solvents and residue which can degrade the new replaced
lubricant, also can degrade the seals and gaskets
intervals.
* Kia does recommend flushing the oil cooler during A/T replacement, refer to the appropriate
Transmission TSB.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
A/T .......................................................................................................................................................
............................................................ 7.19 qt (6.8L) M/T ...................................................................
............................................................................................................................................... 7.08 qt
(6.7L)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 977
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Coolant
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
........... Ethylene glycol base for aluminium radiators.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Locations
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan (High) Relay
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan (High) Relay > Page 987
E/R Fuse & Relay Box View
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan (High) Relay > Page 988
E/R Fuse & Relay Box View
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan (High) Relay > Page 989
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan (Low) Relay
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Cooling Fan (High) Relay
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Cooling Fan (High) Relay
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Cooling Fan (Low) Relay
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan (High) Relay
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan (High) Relay > Page 1002
E/R Fuse & Relay Box View
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan (High) Relay > Page 1003
E/R Fuse & Relay Box View
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan (High) Relay > Page 1004
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan (Low) Relay
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Cooling Fan (High) Relay
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Cooling Fan (High) Relay
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Cooling Fan (Low) Relay
M13-A BCM
M13-B BCM
M13-C BCM
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304
Engine Control Module: Recalls Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 091[Rev 1]
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: ECM UPGRADE - MIL ON WITH DTC P0300 - P0304 LOGIC
(SA070)
*NOTICE
This bulletin provides information related to the ECM software upgrade of some 2011MY Sportage
(SL) 2.4L vehicles produced from start of production to December 20, 2010 which may experience
a Malfunction Indicator Lamp illuminated with the ECM (Electronic Control Module) system-related
DTC P0300-P0304.
Please perform this Service Action for all dealer in-stock units prior to retail sales. For confirmation
that the latest reflash has been performed to a vehicle you are working on, verify ROM ID using the
tables in this TSB.
To correct this condition, the ECM should be reprogrammed using GDS download as described
below.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1028
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1029
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1030
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1031
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Recalls: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1032
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
SA070 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For
MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For
MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 091[Rev 1]
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: ECM UPGRADE - MIL ON WITH DTC P0300 - P0304 LOGIC
(SA070)
*NOTICE
This bulletin provides information related to the ECM software upgrade of some 2011MY Sportage
(SL) 2.4L vehicles produced from start of production to December 20, 2010 which may experience
a Malfunction Indicator Lamp illuminated with the ECM (Electronic Control Module) system-related
DTC P0300-P0304.
Please perform this Service Action for all dealer in-stock units prior to retail sales. For confirmation
that the latest reflash has been performed to a vehicle you are working on, verify ROM ID using the
tables in this TSB.
To correct this condition, the ECM should be reprogrammed using GDS download as described
below.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For
MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1038
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For
MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1039
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For
MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1040
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For
MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1041
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For
MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1042
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
SA070 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 090
This bulletin provides information related to extracting "In use performance tracking" missions data
from the engine control unit (ECU) in certain vehicles sold in California. The California Air Resource
Board (GARB) requires this emissions data to be extracted from the ECUs of a number of
customer owned 2011 model year vehicles with a minimum of 3000 accumulated miles without
reprogramming or resetting. To facilitate collection of this data at the dealer level, changes to the
GDS have been made so that screen shots will allow the capture of relevant parameters.
*NOTICE
This data collection does not apply to vehicles or dealers operating outside of California.
*NOTICE
IF THE VEHICLE MEETS THE CRITERIA BELOW, CALIFORNIA DEALERS MUST PERFORM
THIS DATA COLLECTION ON VEHICLES WHENEVER AN AFFECTED VEHICLE IS IN THE
SHOP FOR ANY MAINTENANCE OR REPAIRS.
For vehicles listed on DCS as requiring this procedure, follow the instructions in this bulletin after
confirming that the following criteria are met:
^ WebDCS shows this as an open Data Collection code DC002A-B (depending on model) for the
vehicle.
^ Vehicle repair history does not show battery replacement/disconnection/reset or an ECU Update
done in the last 3000 miles, because IUMPR data
CAUTION
If vehicle meets above criteria, collect data prior to any other campaign or repair-related activities.
Service Procedure:
1. Open the engine compartment and locate the emission label under the hood. Locate and write
down the "Group" number found on the label for later
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 1047
form entry.
2. To start use the Global Diagnostic System (GDS). Begin by clicking on "ID Register". Click on
"Auto VIN" or manually enter vehicle information on the next screen.
*NOTICE
3. Choose "Engine" under "Select System". Click "OK" and follow screen instructions for
connecting to vehicle.
4. To verify the VIN, select "Read VIN" under the "Vehicle S/W Management" menu. Click "OK"
and write down the VIN for later form entry.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 1048
5a. Select "System Identification".
5b. Write down the "Calibration ID" or "ROM ID" number for later form entry. Next go to the main
screen by clicking on the "GDS" logo at the top left of the screen.
*NOTICE
If all values indicate "Not Supported" or "0", check to make sure you have GDS software version
N-K-01-07-0010 or later. If the software version is correct, and all values show "Not Supported" or
"0", the vehicle will not qualify for this data collection, as it may have received a recent ECM
Update or battery replacement/reset of the data values.
*NOTICE
Make sure you capture the entire screen, if only part of the list is displayed, first click "Expand"
button, then proceed to capture the entire screen.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 1050
9. Select "Scantool Area - Full" and click "Send to file". The GDS will set up a designation folder
and file name to save the captured data. Please change the file name to include the model/engine,
the last 6 of the VIN and the date (mmddyyyy). Before saving, write down the file name and
designation folder for further reference.
Example
10. After saving the file, return to the GDS home page by clicking on "GDS" logo in the upper left
hand corner.
^ Type "Group:" followed by the group number from the Vehicle Emission Control Information label
in step 1.
^ Add RO#.
*NOTICE
Please check to ensure both group and Cal ID numbers are correctly entered.
13. To attach the data to the feedback form, click on the "Browse" button.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 1052
14. Refer to the file name and destination from step 9.
^ Navigate to: Local Disk (D:) / gvciData / Record /
^ Once the file name appears in the "File Name" box, click on the "Open" button.
15. When the file name appears in the attachment field and all the information has been entered,
click the "Submit" button.
*NOTICE
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 1053
*NOTICE
You may also print the data prior to submitting as record to attach to the RO.
*NOTICE
VIN inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
DC002 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 090
This bulletin provides information related to extracting "In use performance tracking" missions data
from the engine control unit (ECU) in certain vehicles sold in California. The California Air Resource
Board (GARB) requires this emissions data to be extracted from the ECUs of a number of
customer owned 2011 model year vehicles with a minimum of 3000 accumulated miles without
reprogramming or resetting. To facilitate collection of this data at the dealer level, changes to the
GDS have been made so that screen shots will allow the capture of relevant parameters.
*NOTICE
This data collection does not apply to vehicles or dealers operating outside of California.
*NOTICE
IF THE VEHICLE MEETS THE CRITERIA BELOW, CALIFORNIA DEALERS MUST PERFORM
THIS DATA COLLECTION ON VEHICLES WHENEVER AN AFFECTED VEHICLE IS IN THE
SHOP FOR ANY MAINTENANCE OR REPAIRS.
For vehicles listed on DCS as requiring this procedure, follow the instructions in this bulletin after
confirming that the following criteria are met:
^ WebDCS shows this as an open Data Collection code DC002A-B (depending on model) for the
vehicle.
^ Vehicle repair history does not show battery replacement/disconnection/reset or an ECU Update
done in the last 3000 miles, because IUMPR data
CAUTION
If vehicle meets above criteria, collect data prior to any other campaign or repair-related activities.
Service Procedure:
1. Open the engine compartment and locate the emission label under the hood. Locate and write
down the "Group" number found on the label for later
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 1059
form entry.
2. To start use the Global Diagnostic System (GDS). Begin by clicking on "ID Register". Click on
"Auto VIN" or manually enter vehicle information on the next screen.
*NOTICE
3. Choose "Engine" under "Select System". Click "OK" and follow screen instructions for
connecting to vehicle.
4. To verify the VIN, select "Read VIN" under the "Vehicle S/W Management" menu. Click "OK"
and write down the VIN for later form entry.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 1060
5a. Select "System Identification".
5b. Write down the "Calibration ID" or "ROM ID" number for later form entry. Next go to the main
screen by clicking on the "GDS" logo at the top left of the screen.
*NOTICE
If all values indicate "Not Supported" or "0", check to make sure you have GDS software version
N-K-01-07-0010 or later. If the software version is correct, and all values show "Not Supported" or
"0", the vehicle will not qualify for this data collection, as it may have received a recent ECM
Update or battery replacement/reset of the data values.
*NOTICE
Make sure you capture the entire screen, if only part of the list is displayed, first click "Expand"
button, then proceed to capture the entire screen.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 1062
9. Select "Scantool Area - Full" and click "Send to file". The GDS will set up a designation folder
and file name to save the captured data. Please change the file name to include the model/engine,
the last 6 of the VIN and the date (mmddyyyy). Before saving, write down the file name and
designation folder for further reference.
Example
10. After saving the file, return to the GDS home page by clicking on "GDS" logo in the upper left
hand corner.
^ Type "Group:" followed by the group number from the Vehicle Emission Control Information label
in step 1.
^ Add RO#.
*NOTICE
Please check to ensure both group and Cal ID numbers are correctly entered.
13. To attach the data to the feedback form, click on the "Browse" button.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 1064
14. Refer to the file name and destination from step 9.
^ Navigate to: Local Disk (D:) / gvciData / Record /
^ Once the file name appears in the "File Name" box, click on the "Open" button.
15. When the file name appears in the attachment field and all the information has been entered,
click the "Submit" button.
*NOTICE
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction > Page 1065
*NOTICE
You may also print the data prior to submitting as record to attach to the RO.
*NOTICE
VIN inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
DC002 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
1066
STACK:
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules
- Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Number KT2008090302
Area N.America
- Description
KMA has found in some cases that the Accelerator Position Sensor (APS) as part of the
accelerator pedal assembly is being replaced unneccessarily for DTC P2135. P2135 is the code for
the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) which is part of the Electronic Throttle Control Actuator (ETC).
Should a problem occur with the Accelerator Position Sensor (APS), DTC P2138 would be set, not
P2135.
Some confusion may occur when viewing the GDS/KGIS descriptor for P2135 and P2138, both of
which have similar wording - Throttle/pedal Position Sensor Switch Correlation. KMA is actively
working to have this corrected in future GDS/KGIS releases. Until that time, please be aware the
DTC P2135 relates to the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) and DTC 2138 relates to the Accelerator
position Sensor (APS) respectively.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 1090
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 1145
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 1147
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 1148
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 1149
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 1150
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 1151
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 1152
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 1154
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 1155
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 1156
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
SD436-1 Vehicle Speed System (1)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 1157
SD436-2 Vehicle Speed System (2)
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by SD number (i.e SD130-4, etc.) within these diagrams can
be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be
found via the photo number at the vehicle level under Locations by Photo Number. See:
Locations/Component Locations
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Engine Management DTCs P2135 and P2138
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Engine
Management DTCs P2135 and P2138
Model All Model
Number KT2008090302
Area N.America
- Description
KMA has found in some cases that the Accelerator Position Sensor (APS) as part of the
accelerator pedal assembly is being replaced unneccessarily for DTC P2135. P2135 is the code for
the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) which is part of the Electronic Throttle Control Actuator (ETC).
Should a problem occur with the Accelerator Position Sensor (APS), DTC P2138 would be set, not
P2135.
Some confusion may occur when viewing the GDS/KGIS descriptor for P2135 and P2138, both of
which have similar wording - Throttle/pedal Position Sensor Switch Correlation. KMA is actively
working to have this corrected in future GDS/KGIS releases. Until that time, please be aware the
DTC P2135 relates to the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) and DTC 2138 relates to the Accelerator
position Sensor (APS) respectively.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 1163
Ignition Switch: Diagrams Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch (W/O Smart Key)
M09 Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch (W/O Smart Key)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning
Switch (W/O Smart Key) > Page 1187
- Tag or mark vacuum hoses before disconnecting them. After completing a job, double check that
the vacuum hoses are properly connected.
- To disconnect vacuum hoses, pull on the end, not the middle of the hose.
- To pull apart electrical connectors, pull on the connector itself, not the wires.
- Before disconnecting pressurized fuel lines, always perform Fuel Pressure Release procedure in
order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury.
- When replacing fuel filters, always check all affected lines and fittings for leaks.
- Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or
explosion.
Number KT2008090302
Area N.America
- Description
KMA has found in some cases that the Accelerator Position Sensor (APS) as part of the
accelerator pedal assembly is being replaced unneccessarily for DTC P2135. P2135 is the code for
the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) which is part of the Electronic Throttle Control Actuator (ETC).
Should a problem occur with the Accelerator Position Sensor (APS), DTC P2138 would be set, not
P2135.
Some confusion may occur when viewing the GDS/KGIS descriptor for P2135 and P2138, both of
which have similar wording - Throttle/pedal Position Sensor Switch Correlation. KMA is actively
working to have this corrected in future GDS/KGIS releases. Until that time, please be aware the
DTC P2135 relates to the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) and DTC 2138 relates to the Accelerator
position Sensor (APS) respectively.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1201
M13-A BCM
M13-B BCM
M13-C BCM
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor #1
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1232
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1234
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1235
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1236
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1237
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1238
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1239
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1241
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1242
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1243
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by SD number (i.e SD130-4, etc.) within these diagrams can
be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be
found via the photo number at the vehicle level under Locations by Photo Number. See:
Locations/Component Locations
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Throttle Actuator: >
ENG086 > Dec > 10 > Campaign SA064 - VCMA Replacement For Misfire DTC's
Electronic Throttle Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA064 - VCMA
Replacement For Misfire DTC's
GROUP ENG
NUMBER 086
SUBJECT: COMBINED TSB/SERVICE ACTION: SPORTAGE (SL) MIL ON WITH DTC P0300 -
P0304 - VCMA REPLACEMENT (SA064)
This bulletin provides information relating to some Sportage (SL) 2011MY vehicles produced from
Job # 1 - November 22, 2010 equipped with a 2.4L engine that may experience an illuminated
Malfunction Indicator Lamp without any discernible driving concerns. Please check for engine
misfire related DTC(s) listed below:
To improve customer satisfaction Kia is launching this Service Action and replacing the VCMA on
all affected 2011 Sportage vehicles that fall within the vehicle production range mentioned above.
The Inspection Procedure outlined below details a check for engine misfire-related DTC(s).
If any are detected, replace the VCMA (Variable Charge Motion Actuator) following the Service
Procedure.
For vehicles not on the Affected Vehicles List, but with a customer concern; perform the following
procedure outlined in this bulletin and submit a warranty claim per "customer concern" (Standard
TSB) claim information below.
NOTICE
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer requesting to perform this repair outside the warranty period will
require DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs ? Not Completed Recall > Recall VIN > Select Report),
which includes a list of affected vehicles.
Inspection Procedure:
1. Verify that the engine is cold; engine coolant temperature ranges from 14°F (10°C) to 91°F
(33°C). In case the engine is too hot, wait until the engine cools down naturally.
2. Start the engine and let idle for approximately one minute.
Using GDS, check for misfire-related DTC(s): P0300, P0301, P0302, P0304
*NOTICE
If any of the above DTCs are detected, replace the VCMA with the new assembly following the
procedure below. If none are detected, no further action is needed.
NOTICE
Before disconnecting the upper radiator hose, place a container under the radiator hose (C) to
catch the engine coolant.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Throttle Actuator: >
ENG086 > Dec > 10 > Campaign SA064 - VCMA Replacement For Misfire DTC's > Page 1257
3. Disconnect the VCMA wiring connector (D); then disconnect coolant hose (E).
4. Remove the three (3) VCMA mounting bolts as indicated by the circles.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Throttle Actuator: >
ENG086 > Dec > 10 > Campaign SA064 - VCMA Replacement For Misfire DTC's > Page 1258
5. Remove the VCMA assembly (F).
CAUTION
CAUTION
When reinstalling the VCMA coupling, make sure that the circle grove side of (H) faces the intake
manifold, and the straight groove side of (I) faces the VCMA assembly.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Throttle Actuator: >
ENG086 > Dec > 10 > Campaign SA064 - VCMA Replacement For Misfire DTC's > Page 1259
Add sufficient amount of engine coolant; run engine and check for coolant leaks.
REQUIRED PARTS
Used this information only to file a warranty claim for vehicles for which:
2. The VIN does not appear on the Affected Vehicles List for Service Action SA064.
3. The vehicle model year and production date range are as identified in this bulletin.
NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
SA064 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Throttle Actuator: >
ENG078 > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - ETC Adaptive Value Reset Procedure
Electronic Throttle Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ETC Adaptive Value
Reset Procedure
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 078
MODEL Rondo (UN), Forte/Forte Koup (TD), Optima (TF), Optima (MG) Sorento (XM), Sportage
(SL)
This bulletin provides the procedure to reset (erase) and relearn the Electronic Throttle Control
(ETC) adaptive value (throttle valve position) on the following Kia vehicles: Rondo (UN),
Forte/Forte Koup (TD), Optima (TF), Optima (MG), Sorento (XM), and Sportage (SL) with
Theta-2.0/2.4L gasoline engines with ETC systems.
After the following repairs have been completed, the ETC adaptive value must be reset / relearned.
If starting engine without resetting / relearning the ETC adaptive values; DTCs P0638 or P2110 will
be stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will be illuminated.
^ ECM replacement
Caution
2. Clear DTC(s)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Throttle Actuator: >
ENG078 > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - ETC Adaptive Value Reset Procedure > Page 1265
3. Select Option/Data Treatment
4. Resetting adaptive values
5. Select "Reset" then wait 10 seconds after turning ignition key off (Relay OFF).
6. Wait for 5 seconds after turning ignition ON (ETC adaptive value relearn).
7, Start engine.
8. Recheck DTC(s).
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Throttle Actuator: >
ENG078 > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - ETC Adaptive Value Reset Procedure > Page 1266
Caution
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > ENG086 > Dec > 10 > Campaign SA064 - VCMA
Replacement For Misfire DTC's
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Recalls Campaign SA064 - VCMA Replacement For Misfire DTC's
GROUP ENG
NUMBER 086
SUBJECT: COMBINED TSB/SERVICE ACTION: SPORTAGE (SL) MIL ON WITH DTC P0300 -
P0304 - VCMA REPLACEMENT (SA064)
This bulletin provides information relating to some Sportage (SL) 2011MY vehicles produced from
Job # 1 - November 22, 2010 equipped with a 2.4L engine that may experience an illuminated
Malfunction Indicator Lamp without any discernible driving concerns. Please check for engine
misfire related DTC(s) listed below:
To improve customer satisfaction Kia is launching this Service Action and replacing the VCMA on
all affected 2011 Sportage vehicles that fall within the vehicle production range mentioned above.
The Inspection Procedure outlined below details a check for engine misfire-related DTC(s).
If any are detected, replace the VCMA (Variable Charge Motion Actuator) following the Service
Procedure.
For vehicles not on the Affected Vehicles List, but with a customer concern; perform the following
procedure outlined in this bulletin and submit a warranty claim per "customer concern" (Standard
TSB) claim information below.
NOTICE
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer requesting to perform this repair outside the warranty period will
require DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs ? Not Completed Recall > Recall VIN > Select Report),
which includes a list of affected vehicles.
Inspection Procedure:
1. Verify that the engine is cold; engine coolant temperature ranges from 14°F (10°C) to 91°F
(33°C). In case the engine is too hot, wait until the engine cools down naturally.
2. Start the engine and let idle for approximately one minute.
Using GDS, check for misfire-related DTC(s): P0300, P0301, P0302, P0304
*NOTICE
If any of the above DTCs are detected, replace the VCMA with the new assembly following the
procedure below. If none are detected, no further action is needed.
NOTICE
Before disconnecting the upper radiator hose, place a container under the radiator hose (C) to
catch the engine coolant.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > ENG086 > Dec > 10 > Campaign SA064 - VCMA
Replacement For Misfire DTC's > Page 1273
3. Disconnect the VCMA wiring connector (D); then disconnect coolant hose (E).
4. Remove the three (3) VCMA mounting bolts as indicated by the circles.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > ENG086 > Dec > 10 > Campaign SA064 - VCMA
Replacement For Misfire DTC's > Page 1274
5. Remove the VCMA assembly (F).
CAUTION
CAUTION
When reinstalling the VCMA coupling, make sure that the circle grove side of (H) faces the intake
manifold, and the straight groove side of (I) faces the VCMA assembly.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > ENG086 > Dec > 10 > Campaign SA064 - VCMA
Replacement For Misfire DTC's > Page 1275
Add sufficient amount of engine coolant; run engine and check for coolant leaks.
REQUIRED PARTS
Used this information only to file a warranty claim for vehicles for which:
2. The VIN does not appear on the Affected Vehicles List for Service Action SA064.
3. The vehicle model year and production date range are as identified in this bulletin.
NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
SA064 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Throttle Actuator: >
ENG078 > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - ETC Adaptive Value Reset Procedure
Electronic Throttle Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ETC Adaptive Value
Reset Procedure
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 078
MODEL Rondo (UN), Forte/Forte Koup (TD), Optima (TF), Optima (MG) Sorento (XM), Sportage
(SL)
This bulletin provides the procedure to reset (erase) and relearn the Electronic Throttle Control
(ETC) adaptive value (throttle valve position) on the following Kia vehicles: Rondo (UN),
Forte/Forte Koup (TD), Optima (TF), Optima (MG), Sorento (XM), and Sportage (SL) with
Theta-2.0/2.4L gasoline engines with ETC systems.
After the following repairs have been completed, the ETC adaptive value must be reset / relearned.
If starting engine without resetting / relearning the ETC adaptive values; DTCs P0638 or P2110 will
be stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will be illuminated.
^ ECM replacement
Caution
2. Clear DTC(s)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Throttle Actuator: >
ENG078 > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - ETC Adaptive Value Reset Procedure > Page 1282
3. Select Option/Data Treatment
4. Resetting adaptive values
5. Select "Reset" then wait 10 seconds after turning ignition key off (Relay OFF).
6. Wait for 5 seconds after turning ignition ON (ETC adaptive value relearn).
7, Start engine.
8. Recheck DTC(s).
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Throttle Actuator: >
ENG078 > Nov > 10 > Engine Controls - ETC Adaptive Value Reset Procedure > Page 1283
Caution
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1284
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For
MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 091[Rev 1]
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: ECM UPGRADE - MIL ON WITH DTC P0300 - P0304 LOGIC
(SA070)
*NOTICE
This bulletin provides information related to the ECM software upgrade of some 2011MY Sportage
(SL) 2.4L vehicles produced from start of production to December 20, 2010 which may experience
a Malfunction Indicator Lamp illuminated with the ECM (Electronic Control Module) system-related
DTC P0300-P0304.
Please perform this Service Action for all dealer in-stock units prior to retail sales. For confirmation
that the latest reflash has been performed to a vehicle you are working on, verify ROM ID using the
tables in this TSB.
To correct this condition, the ECM should be reprogrammed using GDS download as described
below.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1294
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1295
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1296
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1297
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1298
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
SA070 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 090
This bulletin provides information related to extracting "In use performance tracking" missions data
from the engine control unit (ECU) in certain vehicles sold in California. The California Air Resource
Board (GARB) requires this emissions data to be extracted from the ECUs of a number of
customer owned 2011 model year vehicles with a minimum of 3000 accumulated miles without
reprogramming or resetting. To facilitate collection of this data at the dealer level, changes to the
GDS have been made so that screen shots will allow the capture of relevant parameters.
*NOTICE
This data collection does not apply to vehicles or dealers operating outside of California.
*NOTICE
IF THE VEHICLE MEETS THE CRITERIA BELOW, CALIFORNIA DEALERS MUST PERFORM
THIS DATA COLLECTION ON VEHICLES WHENEVER AN AFFECTED VEHICLE IS IN THE
SHOP FOR ANY MAINTENANCE OR REPAIRS.
For vehicles listed on DCS as requiring this procedure, follow the instructions in this bulletin after
confirming that the following criteria are met:
^ WebDCS shows this as an open Data Collection code DC002A-B (depending on model) for the
vehicle.
^ Vehicle repair history does not show battery replacement/disconnection/reset or an ECU Update
done in the last 3000 miles, because IUMPR data
CAUTION
If vehicle meets above criteria, collect data prior to any other campaign or repair-related activities.
Service Procedure:
1. Open the engine compartment and locate the emission label under the hood. Locate and write
down the "Group" number found on the label for later
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction > Page 1303
form entry.
2. To start use the Global Diagnostic System (GDS). Begin by clicking on "ID Register". Click on
"Auto VIN" or manually enter vehicle information on the next screen.
*NOTICE
3. Choose "Engine" under "Select System". Click "OK" and follow screen instructions for
connecting to vehicle.
4. To verify the VIN, select "Read VIN" under the "Vehicle S/W Management" menu. Click "OK"
and write down the VIN for later form entry.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction > Page 1304
5a. Select "System Identification".
5b. Write down the "Calibration ID" or "ROM ID" number for later form entry. Next go to the main
screen by clicking on the "GDS" logo at the top left of the screen.
*NOTICE
If all values indicate "Not Supported" or "0", check to make sure you have GDS software version
N-K-01-07-0010 or later. If the software version is correct, and all values show "Not Supported" or
"0", the vehicle will not qualify for this data collection, as it may have received a recent ECM
Update or battery replacement/reset of the data values.
*NOTICE
Make sure you capture the entire screen, if only part of the list is displayed, first click "Expand"
button, then proceed to capture the entire screen.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction > Page 1306
9. Select "Scantool Area - Full" and click "Send to file". The GDS will set up a designation folder
and file name to save the captured data. Please change the file name to include the model/engine,
the last 6 of the VIN and the date (mmddyyyy). Before saving, write down the file name and
designation folder for further reference.
Example
10. After saving the file, return to the GDS home page by clicking on "GDS" logo in the upper left
hand corner.
^ Type "Group:" followed by the group number from the Vehicle Emission Control Information label
in step 1.
^ Add RO#.
*NOTICE
Please check to ensure both group and Cal ID numbers are correctly entered.
13. To attach the data to the feedback form, click on the "Browse" button.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction > Page 1308
14. Refer to the file name and destination from step 9.
^ Navigate to: Local Disk (D:) / gvciData / Record /
^ Once the file name appears in the "File Name" box, click on the "Open" button.
15. When the file name appears in the attachment field and all the information has been entered,
click the "Submit" button.
*NOTICE
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction > Page 1309
*NOTICE
You may also print the data prior to submitting as record to attach to the RO.
*NOTICE
VIN inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
DC002 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM
Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304
Engine Control Module: Recalls Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 091[Rev 1]
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: ECM UPGRADE - MIL ON WITH DTC P0300 - P0304 LOGIC
(SA070)
*NOTICE
This bulletin provides information related to the ECM software upgrade of some 2011MY Sportage
(SL) 2.4L vehicles produced from start of production to December 20, 2010 which may experience
a Malfunction Indicator Lamp illuminated with the ECM (Electronic Control Module) system-related
DTC P0300-P0304.
Please perform this Service Action for all dealer in-stock units prior to retail sales. For confirmation
that the latest reflash has been performed to a vehicle you are working on, verify ROM ID using the
tables in this TSB.
To correct this condition, the ECM should be reprogrammed using GDS download as described
below.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM
Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1315
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM
Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1316
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM
Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1317
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM
Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1318
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM
Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1319
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
SA070 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 >
Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 090
This bulletin provides information related to extracting "In use performance tracking" missions data
from the engine control unit (ECU) in certain vehicles sold in California. The California Air Resource
Board (GARB) requires this emissions data to be extracted from the ECUs of a number of
customer owned 2011 model year vehicles with a minimum of 3000 accumulated miles without
reprogramming or resetting. To facilitate collection of this data at the dealer level, changes to the
GDS have been made so that screen shots will allow the capture of relevant parameters.
*NOTICE
This data collection does not apply to vehicles or dealers operating outside of California.
*NOTICE
IF THE VEHICLE MEETS THE CRITERIA BELOW, CALIFORNIA DEALERS MUST PERFORM
THIS DATA COLLECTION ON VEHICLES WHENEVER AN AFFECTED VEHICLE IS IN THE
SHOP FOR ANY MAINTENANCE OR REPAIRS.
For vehicles listed on DCS as requiring this procedure, follow the instructions in this bulletin after
confirming that the following criteria are met:
^ WebDCS shows this as an open Data Collection code DC002A-B (depending on model) for the
vehicle.
^ Vehicle repair history does not show battery replacement/disconnection/reset or an ECU Update
done in the last 3000 miles, because IUMPR data
CAUTION
If vehicle meets above criteria, collect data prior to any other campaign or repair-related activities.
Service Procedure:
1. Open the engine compartment and locate the emission label under the hood. Locate and write
down the "Group" number found on the label for later
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 >
Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction > Page 1325
form entry.
2. To start use the Global Diagnostic System (GDS). Begin by clicking on "ID Register". Click on
"Auto VIN" or manually enter vehicle information on the next screen.
*NOTICE
3. Choose "Engine" under "Select System". Click "OK" and follow screen instructions for
connecting to vehicle.
4. To verify the VIN, select "Read VIN" under the "Vehicle S/W Management" menu. Click "OK"
and write down the VIN for later form entry.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 >
Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction > Page 1326
5a. Select "System Identification".
5b. Write down the "Calibration ID" or "ROM ID" number for later form entry. Next go to the main
screen by clicking on the "GDS" logo at the top left of the screen.
*NOTICE
If all values indicate "Not Supported" or "0", check to make sure you have GDS software version
N-K-01-07-0010 or later. If the software version is correct, and all values show "Not Supported" or
"0", the vehicle will not qualify for this data collection, as it may have received a recent ECM
Update or battery replacement/reset of the data values.
*NOTICE
Make sure you capture the entire screen, if only part of the list is displayed, first click "Expand"
button, then proceed to capture the entire screen.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 >
Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction > Page 1328
9. Select "Scantool Area - Full" and click "Send to file". The GDS will set up a designation folder
and file name to save the captured data. Please change the file name to include the model/engine,
the last 6 of the VIN and the date (mmddyyyy). Before saving, write down the file name and
designation folder for further reference.
Example
10. After saving the file, return to the GDS home page by clicking on "GDS" logo in the upper left
hand corner.
^ Type "Group:" followed by the group number from the Vehicle Emission Control Information label
in step 1.
^ Add RO#.
*NOTICE
Please check to ensure both group and Cal ID numbers are correctly entered.
13. To attach the data to the feedback form, click on the "Browse" button.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 >
Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction > Page 1330
14. Refer to the file name and destination from step 9.
^ Navigate to: Local Disk (D:) / gvciData / Record /
^ Once the file name appears in the "File Name" box, click on the "Open" button.
15. When the file name appears in the attachment field and all the information has been entered,
click the "Submit" button.
*NOTICE
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 >
Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction > Page 1331
*NOTICE
You may also print the data prior to submitting as record to attach to the RO.
*NOTICE
VIN inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
DC002 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1332
CHG-A PCM
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1334
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1335
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
M13-A BCM
M13-B BCM
M13-C BCM
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's
P0300-P0304
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For
MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 091[Rev 1]
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: ECM UPGRADE - MIL ON WITH DTC P0300 - P0304 LOGIC
(SA070)
*NOTICE
This bulletin provides information related to the ECM software upgrade of some 2011MY Sportage
(SL) 2.4L vehicles produced from start of production to December 20, 2010 which may experience
a Malfunction Indicator Lamp illuminated with the ECM (Electronic Control Module) system-related
DTC P0300-P0304.
Please perform this Service Action for all dealer in-stock units prior to retail sales. For confirmation
that the latest reflash has been performed to a vehicle you are working on, verify ROM ID using the
tables in this TSB.
To correct this condition, the ECM should be reprogrammed using GDS download as described
below.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's
P0300-P0304 > Page 1374
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's
P0300-P0304 > Page 1375
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's
P0300-P0304 > Page 1376
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's
P0300-P0304 > Page 1377
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's
P0300-P0304 > Page 1378
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
SA070 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 090
This bulletin provides information related to extracting "In use performance tracking" missions data
from the engine control unit (ECU) in certain vehicles sold in California. The California Air Resource
Board (GARB) requires this emissions data to be extracted from the ECUs of a number of
customer owned 2011 model year vehicles with a minimum of 3000 accumulated miles without
reprogramming or resetting. To facilitate collection of this data at the dealer level, changes to the
GDS have been made so that screen shots will allow the capture of relevant parameters.
*NOTICE
This data collection does not apply to vehicles or dealers operating outside of California.
*NOTICE
IF THE VEHICLE MEETS THE CRITERIA BELOW, CALIFORNIA DEALERS MUST PERFORM
THIS DATA COLLECTION ON VEHICLES WHENEVER AN AFFECTED VEHICLE IS IN THE
SHOP FOR ANY MAINTENANCE OR REPAIRS.
For vehicles listed on DCS as requiring this procedure, follow the instructions in this bulletin after
confirming that the following criteria are met:
^ WebDCS shows this as an open Data Collection code DC002A-B (depending on model) for the
vehicle.
^ Vehicle repair history does not show battery replacement/disconnection/reset or an ECU Update
done in the last 3000 miles, because IUMPR data
CAUTION
If vehicle meets above criteria, collect data prior to any other campaign or repair-related activities.
Service Procedure:
1. Open the engine compartment and locate the emission label under the hood. Locate and write
down the "Group" number found on the label for later
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction >
Page 1383
form entry.
2. To start use the Global Diagnostic System (GDS). Begin by clicking on "ID Register". Click on
"Auto VIN" or manually enter vehicle information on the next screen.
*NOTICE
3. Choose "Engine" under "Select System". Click "OK" and follow screen instructions for
connecting to vehicle.
4. To verify the VIN, select "Read VIN" under the "Vehicle S/W Management" menu. Click "OK"
and write down the VIN for later form entry.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction >
Page 1384
5a. Select "System Identification".
5b. Write down the "Calibration ID" or "ROM ID" number for later form entry. Next go to the main
screen by clicking on the "GDS" logo at the top left of the screen.
*NOTICE
If all values indicate "Not Supported" or "0", check to make sure you have GDS software version
N-K-01-07-0010 or later. If the software version is correct, and all values show "Not Supported" or
"0", the vehicle will not qualify for this data collection, as it may have received a recent ECM
Update or battery replacement/reset of the data values.
*NOTICE
Make sure you capture the entire screen, if only part of the list is displayed, first click "Expand"
button, then proceed to capture the entire screen.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction >
Page 1386
9. Select "Scantool Area - Full" and click "Send to file". The GDS will set up a designation folder
and file name to save the captured data. Please change the file name to include the model/engine,
the last 6 of the VIN and the date (mmddyyyy). Before saving, write down the file name and
designation folder for further reference.
Example
10. After saving the file, return to the GDS home page by clicking on "GDS" logo in the upper left
hand corner.
^ Type "Group:" followed by the group number from the Vehicle Emission Control Information label
in step 1.
^ Add RO#.
*NOTICE
Please check to ensure both group and Cal ID numbers are correctly entered.
13. To attach the data to the feedback form, click on the "Browse" button.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction >
Page 1388
14. Refer to the file name and destination from step 9.
^ Navigate to: Local Disk (D:) / gvciData / Record /
^ Once the file name appears in the "File Name" box, click on the "Open" button.
15. When the file name appears in the attachment field and all the information has been entered,
click the "Submit" button.
*NOTICE
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction >
Page 1389
*NOTICE
You may also print the data prior to submitting as record to attach to the RO.
*NOTICE
VIN inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
DC002 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: >
ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304
Engine Control Module: Recalls Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 091[Rev 1]
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: ECM UPGRADE - MIL ON WITH DTC P0300 - P0304 LOGIC
(SA070)
*NOTICE
This bulletin provides information related to the ECM software upgrade of some 2011MY Sportage
(SL) 2.4L vehicles produced from start of production to December 20, 2010 which may experience
a Malfunction Indicator Lamp illuminated with the ECM (Electronic Control Module) system-related
DTC P0300-P0304.
Please perform this Service Action for all dealer in-stock units prior to retail sales. For confirmation
that the latest reflash has been performed to a vehicle you are working on, verify ROM ID using the
tables in this TSB.
To correct this condition, the ECM should be reprogrammed using GDS download as described
below.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: >
ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1395
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: >
ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1396
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: >
ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1397
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: >
ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1398
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: >
ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1399
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
SA070 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - California Emissions Data
Extraction
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 090
This bulletin provides information related to extracting "In use performance tracking" missions data
from the engine control unit (ECU) in certain vehicles sold in California. The California Air Resource
Board (GARB) requires this emissions data to be extracted from the ECUs of a number of
customer owned 2011 model year vehicles with a minimum of 3000 accumulated miles without
reprogramming or resetting. To facilitate collection of this data at the dealer level, changes to the
GDS have been made so that screen shots will allow the capture of relevant parameters.
*NOTICE
This data collection does not apply to vehicles or dealers operating outside of California.
*NOTICE
IF THE VEHICLE MEETS THE CRITERIA BELOW, CALIFORNIA DEALERS MUST PERFORM
THIS DATA COLLECTION ON VEHICLES WHENEVER AN AFFECTED VEHICLE IS IN THE
SHOP FOR ANY MAINTENANCE OR REPAIRS.
For vehicles listed on DCS as requiring this procedure, follow the instructions in this bulletin after
confirming that the following criteria are met:
^ WebDCS shows this as an open Data Collection code DC002A-B (depending on model) for the
vehicle.
^ Vehicle repair history does not show battery replacement/disconnection/reset or an ECU Update
done in the last 3000 miles, because IUMPR data
CAUTION
If vehicle meets above criteria, collect data prior to any other campaign or repair-related activities.
Service Procedure:
1. Open the engine compartment and locate the emission label under the hood. Locate and write
down the "Group" number found on the label for later
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction > Page 1405
form entry.
2. To start use the Global Diagnostic System (GDS). Begin by clicking on "ID Register". Click on
"Auto VIN" or manually enter vehicle information on the next screen.
*NOTICE
3. Choose "Engine" under "Select System". Click "OK" and follow screen instructions for
connecting to vehicle.
4. To verify the VIN, select "Read VIN" under the "Vehicle S/W Management" menu. Click "OK"
and write down the VIN for later form entry.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction > Page 1406
5a. Select "System Identification".
5b. Write down the "Calibration ID" or "ROM ID" number for later form entry. Next go to the main
screen by clicking on the "GDS" logo at the top left of the screen.
*NOTICE
If all values indicate "Not Supported" or "0", check to make sure you have GDS software version
N-K-01-07-0010 or later. If the software version is correct, and all values show "Not Supported" or
"0", the vehicle will not qualify for this data collection, as it may have received a recent ECM
Update or battery replacement/reset of the data values.
*NOTICE
Make sure you capture the entire screen, if only part of the list is displayed, first click "Expand"
button, then proceed to capture the entire screen.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction > Page 1408
9. Select "Scantool Area - Full" and click "Send to file". The GDS will set up a designation folder
and file name to save the captured data. Please change the file name to include the model/engine,
the last 6 of the VIN and the date (mmddyyyy). Before saving, write down the file name and
designation folder for further reference.
Example
10. After saving the file, return to the GDS home page by clicking on "GDS" logo in the upper left
hand corner.
^ Type "Group:" followed by the group number from the Vehicle Emission Control Information label
in step 1.
^ Add RO#.
*NOTICE
Please check to ensure both group and Cal ID numbers are correctly entered.
13. To attach the data to the feedback form, click on the "Browse" button.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction > Page 1410
14. Refer to the file name and destination from step 9.
^ Navigate to: Local Disk (D:) / gvciData / Record /
^ Once the file name appears in the "File Name" box, click on the "Open" button.
15. When the file name appears in the attachment field and all the information has been entered,
click the "Submit" button.
*NOTICE
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service
Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > ENG090 > Feb > 11 > Emissions - California Emissions Data Extraction > Page 1411
*NOTICE
You may also print the data prior to submitting as record to attach to the RO.
*NOTICE
VIN inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
DC002 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1412
CHG-A PCM
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1414
CHG-K PCM
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Number KT2008090302
Area N.America
- Description
KMA has found in some cases that the Accelerator Position Sensor (APS) as part of the
accelerator pedal assembly is being replaced unneccessarily for DTC P2135. P2135 is the code for
the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) which is part of the Electronic Throttle Control Actuator (ETC).
Should a problem occur with the Accelerator Position Sensor (APS), DTC P2138 would be set, not
P2135.
Some confusion may occur when viewing the GDS/KGIS descriptor for P2135 and P2138, both of
which have similar wording - Throttle/pedal Position Sensor Switch Correlation. KMA is actively
working to have this corrected in future GDS/KGIS releases. Until that time, please be aware the
DTC P2135 relates to the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) and DTC 2138 relates to the Accelerator
position Sensor (APS) respectively.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Computers
and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
1424
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Computers
and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 1479
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Computers
and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 1481
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Computers
and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 1482
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Computers
and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 1483
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Computers
and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 1484
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Computers
and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 1485
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Computers
and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 1486
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Computers
and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 1488
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Computers
and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 1489
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Computers
and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 1490
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
SD436-1 Vehicle Speed System (1)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Computers
and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 1491
SD436-2 Vehicle Speed System (2)
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by SD number (i.e SD130-4, etc.) within these diagrams can
be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be
found via the photo number at the vehicle level under Locations by Photo Number. See:
Locations/Component Locations
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1511
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1513
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1514
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1515
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1516
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1517
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1518
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1520
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1521
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1522
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Electrical Diagrams
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by SD number (i.e SD130-4, etc.) within these diagrams can
be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be
found via the photo number at the vehicle level under Locations by Photo Number. See:
Locations/Component Locations
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister
Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations
Number KT2008090302
Area N.America
- Description
KMA has found in some cases that the Accelerator Position Sensor (APS) as part of the
accelerator pedal assembly is being replaced unneccessarily for DTC P2135. P2135 is the code for
the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) which is part of the Electronic Throttle Control Actuator (ETC).
Should a problem occur with the Accelerator Position Sensor (APS), DTC P2138 would be set, not
P2135.
Some confusion may occur when viewing the GDS/KGIS descriptor for P2135 and P2138, both of
which have similar wording - Throttle/pedal Position Sensor Switch Correlation. KMA is actively
working to have this corrected in future GDS/KGIS releases. Until that time, please be aware the
DTC P2135 relates to the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) and DTC 2138 relates to the Accelerator
position Sensor (APS) respectively.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1538
CHG24-1 Injector #1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Injector #1 > Page 1544
CHG24-2 Injector #2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Injector #1 > Page 1545
CHG24-3 Injector #3
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Diagrams > Injector #1 > Page 1546
CHG24-4 Injector #4
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Number KT2008090302
Area N.America
- Description
KMA has found in some cases that the Accelerator Position Sensor (APS) as part of the
accelerator pedal assembly is being replaced unneccessarily for DTC P2135. P2135 is the code for
the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) which is part of the Electronic Throttle Control Actuator (ETC).
Should a problem occur with the Accelerator Position Sensor (APS), DTC P2138 would be set, not
P2135.
Some confusion may occur when viewing the GDS/KGIS descriptor for P2135 and P2138, both of
which have similar wording - Throttle/pedal Position Sensor Switch Correlation. KMA is actively
working to have this corrected in future GDS/KGIS releases. Until that time, please be aware the
DTC P2135 relates to the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) and DTC 2138 relates to the Accelerator
position Sensor (APS) respectively.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1577
Ignition Switch: Diagrams Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch (W/O Smart Key)
M09 Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch (W/O Smart Key)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch (W/O Smart Key) > Page 1633
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA070 -
ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 091[Rev 1]
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: ECM UPGRADE - MIL ON WITH DTC P0300 - P0304 LOGIC
(SA070)
*NOTICE
This bulletin provides information related to the ECM software upgrade of some 2011MY Sportage
(SL) 2.4L vehicles produced from start of production to December 20, 2010 which may experience
a Malfunction Indicator Lamp illuminated with the ECM (Electronic Control Module) system-related
DTC P0300-P0304.
Please perform this Service Action for all dealer in-stock units prior to retail sales. For confirmation
that the latest reflash has been performed to a vehicle you are working on, verify ROM ID using the
tables in this TSB.
To correct this condition, the ECM should be reprogrammed using GDS download as described
below.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > ENG091R1
> Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1661
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > ENG091R1
> Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1662
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > ENG091R1
> Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1663
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > ENG091R1
> Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1664
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > ENG091R1
> Feb > 11 > Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1665
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
SA070 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 >
Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Recalls Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For
MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304
GROUP Engine
NUMBER 091[Rev 1]
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: ECM UPGRADE - MIL ON WITH DTC P0300 - P0304 LOGIC
(SA070)
*NOTICE
This bulletin provides information related to the ECM software upgrade of some 2011MY Sportage
(SL) 2.4L vehicles produced from start of production to December 20, 2010 which may experience
a Malfunction Indicator Lamp illuminated with the ECM (Electronic Control Module) system-related
DTC P0300-P0304.
Please perform this Service Action for all dealer in-stock units prior to retail sales. For confirmation
that the latest reflash has been performed to a vehicle you are working on, verify ROM ID using the
tables in this TSB.
To correct this condition, the ECM should be reprogrammed using GDS download as described
below.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 >
Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1671
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 >
Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1672
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 >
Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1673
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 >
Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1674
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > ENG091R1 > Feb > 11 >
Campaign SA070 - ECM Update For MIL/DTC's P0300-P0304 > Page 1675
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
SA070 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators
and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Proper Checking of A/T Fluid Level
Number KT2009043001
Area N.America
- Description
The automatic transmission level should be checked regularly. Keep the vehicle on level ground
with the parking brake.
1. Make sure the transmission fluid temperature is between 158-176°F, use scan tool/GDS to verify
temperature if needed. Checking the fluid level before it has reached operating temperature will
result in false readings. Warm-up time can vary depending on ambient temperature - see sample
graph below.
2. Place the selector lever in P (Park) or N (Neutral) and engine is at idle speed.
3. Confirm the fluid level is in the "HOT" range on the dipstick. If the fluid level is lower, add the
specified fluid as required.
> Normal warm-up time can vary depending on the ambient temperature
> Graph shown is for vehicle in 95°F ambient temperature idling in Park for 30 minutes and finally
reaching the proper temperature to check the fluid level, driving the vehicle for 10-15 minutes will
decrease time to proper temperature
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Proper Checking of A/T Fluid Level > Page 1697
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/A/T - Flushing Systems Not Recommended
Number KT2008082501
Area N.America
- Description
Vehicles produced by Kia Motors Corporation do not require the Engine, Transmission, "Power
Steering and Cooling System to be power flushed. Kia vehicles are designed to give thousands of
miles of trouble free service if all recommended maintenance intervals are followed by the
customer with a simple drain and refill. The use of fluid flush exchangers is not required nor
recommended by Kia.
^ Flush systems add unnecessary maintenance expense not required by the manufacture to
maintain the warranty.
^ Flush systems can leave behind solvents and residue which can degrade the new replaced
lubricant, also can degrade the seals and gaskets
intervals.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Proper Checking of A/T Fluid Level > Page 1698
ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: begin
STACK:
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
............................................................ 7.50 qt (7.1L)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1701
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Type ............ Michang ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV, NOCA ATF SP-IV, KIA Genuine ATF SP-IV or
other brands meting the specification approved by
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
............. FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4 Brake Fluid
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
............................................................ 1.90 qt (1.8L)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1739
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
........................................... API GL-4, SAE 75W/85
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
Number KT2008090502
Area N.America
- Description
Some vehicles may experience a squeaking or grinding noise originating from the front or rear disc
brakes when applying the brake. The concern maybe related to the brake pads sticking and not
moving freely in the slides due to lack of lubrication one/or corrosion. To address this concern
remove, clean and lubricate the brake pad contact area as shown in the article.
^ Clamp mounting bracket into vice and clean the rust and/or corrosion using a wire brush
^ Lubricate the cleaned areas with CRC(R) Synthetic Brake Caliper Grease
CAUTION:
If grease gets on the pad friction material or rotor it must be cleaned before road-testing the
vehicle.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Pad: > TT2008090502 > Sep > 08 > Brake System - Brake Noise
> Page 1792
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Pad: > TT2008090502 > Sep > 08 > Brake System -
Brake Noise
Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brake System - Brake Noise
Number KT2008090502
Area N.America
- Description
Some vehicles may experience a squeaking or grinding noise originating from the front or rear disc
brakes when applying the brake. The concern maybe related to the brake pads sticking and not
moving freely in the slides due to lack of lubrication one/or corrosion. To address this concern
remove, clean and lubricate the brake pad contact area as shown in the article.
^ Clamp mounting bracket into vice and clean the rust and/or corrosion using a wire brush
^ Lubricate the cleaned areas with CRC(R) Synthetic Brake Caliper Grease
CAUTION:
If grease gets on the pad friction material or rotor it must be cleaned before road-testing the
vehicle.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Pad: > TT2008090502 > Sep > 08 > Brake System -
Brake Noise > Page 1798
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Engine/A/T - Flushing Systems Not Recommended
Brake Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/A/T - Flushing Systems Not Recommended
Number KT2008082501
Area N.America
- Description
Vehicles produced by Kia Motors Corporation do not require the Engine, Transmission, "Power
Steering and Cooling System to be power flushed. Kia vehicles are designed to give thousands of
miles of trouble free service if all recommended maintenance intervals are followed by the
customer with a simple drain and refill. The use of fluid flush exchangers is not required nor
recommended by Kia.
^ Flush systems add unnecessary maintenance expense not required by the manufacture to
maintain the warranty.
^ Flush systems can leave behind solvents and residue which can degrade the new replaced
lubricant, also can degrade the seals and gaskets
intervals.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Engine/A/T - Flushing Systems Not Recommended > Page 1804
ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: begin
STACK:
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1805
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Brake Fluid
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................... DOT 3 or DOT 4
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type) > Page 1815
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Brake Switch (Hand Type)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Foot Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type)
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Foot Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type)
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Hand Parking Brake Switch (Hand Type)
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type) > Page 1833
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Brake Switch (Hand Type)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Foot Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type)
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Foot Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type)
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Hand Parking Brake Switch (Hand Type)
Ignition Switch: Diagrams Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch (W/O Smart Key)
M09 Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch (W/O Smart Key)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch (W/O Smart Key) > Page 1874
Keyless Start Control Module: Recalls Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Start Control Module: > BOD070 >
Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 1889
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Start Control Module: > BOD070 >
Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 1890
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Start Control
Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
Keyless Start Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R)
Unit Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Start Control
Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 1898
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Start Control
Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 1899
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Keyless Start Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1903
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1905
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1906
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1907
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1908
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1909
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1910
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1912
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1913
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1914
Keyless Start Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by SD number (i.e SD130-4, etc.) within these diagrams can
be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be
found via the photo number at the vehicle level under Locations by Photo Number. See:
Locations/Component Locations
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Neutral Start Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Alternator: Diagrams
CHG06 Alternator
E13 Alternator
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Ignition Lock Solenoid > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1956
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Ignition Lock Solenoid > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1958
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Ignition Lock Solenoid > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1959
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Ignition Lock Solenoid > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1960
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Ignition Lock Solenoid > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1961
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Ignition Lock Solenoid > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1962
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Ignition Lock Solenoid > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1963
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Ignition Lock Solenoid > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1965
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Ignition Lock Solenoid > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1966
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Ignition Lock Solenoid > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1967
Ignition Switch: Diagrams Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch (W/O Smart Key)
M09 Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch (W/O Smart Key)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch (W/O Smart Key) > Page 1973
Keyless Start Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R)
Unit Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Start Control
Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 1987
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Start Control
Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 1988
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Start Control Module: > BOD070 >
Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
Keyless Start Control Module: Recalls Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Start Control Module: > BOD070 >
Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 1996
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Start Control Module: > BOD070 >
Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 1997
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Keyless Start Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2001
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2003
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2004
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2005
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2006
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2007
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2008
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2010
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2011
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2012
Keyless Start Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by SD number (i.e SD130-4, etc.) within these diagrams can
be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be
found via the photo number at the vehicle level under Locations by Photo Number. See:
Locations/Component Locations
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Systems - Smart Key Programming Information
Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Smart Key Programming
Information
GROUP GEN
NUMBER 048
SUBJECT: SMART KEY PROGRAMING PROCEDURES WHEN BOTH SMART KEYS ARE LOST
This bulletin provides programming information for vehicles for which both Smart Keys are missing
Without a Smart Key the vehicle will not power up Please follow the programming procedure
outlined in this bulletin when replacing both Smart Keys.
*NOTICE
If it is determined that a customer has lost both Smart Keys, then the customer will be responsible
for the cost or replacement Smart Keys.
Programming Procedure:
The screen shown above is for demonstrative purposes only and will vary depending on model.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Systems - Smart Key Programming Information > Page
2020
3. Select PIC for the system, and then the Smart Key Unit.
Press OK.
5. Neutralize all three modules. PIN codes must be entered, (PIN codes can be found on KGIS).
6. Once all three modules have been neutralized, select System to change to PIC System Code
Saving.
8. Insert a NEW Smart Key into the holder in the center armrest as per the on screen prompt.
Press OK
*NOTICE
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2051
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2053
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2054
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2055
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2056
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2057
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2058
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2060
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2061
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2062
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views
Diode: Diagrams
Z01 Diode
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Cell Chargers Blow Fuse to Accessory Socket
Fuse: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Cell Chargers Blow Fuse to Accessory Socket
Number KT2009112001
Area N.America
Subject Fuse For Power Accessory Socket And Cigar Lighter Blown Due To The Use Of
Aftermarket Cellular Chargers Or Similar Plug In Devices
- Description
Fuse For Power Accessory Socket And Cigar Lighter Blown Due To The Use Of Aftermarket
Cellular Chargers Of Similar Plug In Devices
Customers should be advised against the use of some kinds of inexpensive aftermarket cell phone
chargers (or similar plug in devices) due to their use of a removable in-line fuse which causes
susceptibility to haveing small parts detach and short out across the receptacle terminal. If you
incounter a blown fuse for Power Accessory Socket and Cigar Lighter inquire with the customer as
to which brand of cell phone charger etc. they are currently using and advise them to discontinue
the use where applicable. Parching an approved cell phone charger from their cell phone carrier's
Online or retail store should correct this condition.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Cell Chargers Blow Fuse to Accessory Socket > Page 2070
Fuse: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - New Fuse Design on All Vehicles
Number KT2009060301
Area N.America
- Description
This Pitstop publication advises of the use of new fuse designs (for Kia). Some Kia vehicles have
begun to use lower profile fuses then what's been previously used. They currently are difficult to
find outside of O.E.M. parts suppliers. The fuses are industry categorized as Low Profile Fuses,
and come in various types and amperage ratings.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2071
Fuse: Locations
STACK:
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Powertrain Grounds
Grounding Point: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Powertrain Grounds
Number KT2009083101
Area N.America
- Description
Powertrain Grounds
Upon encountering powertrain DTC's, check that the powertrain main ground is good before
attempting any repairs.
When diagnosing any "P" or "C" Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in which normal diagnostic steps
do not quickly reveal the problem, check that the powertrain assembly is properly grounded to the
body/chassis/battery.
Powertrain assemblies all have at least one ground to body/chassis/battery and in some cases
more. A poorly grounded powertrain assembly does not necessarily produce a "string" of DTC's;
check the connections even if you only retrieve one or two DTC's. Not identifying the poor ground
can (and does) lead to many hours being spent and parts being replaced unneccessarily.
Be aware that a quick voltage drop check between the powertrain and body/chassis/battery while
at engine idle or in the shop under low load conditions may not reveal this concern. Powertrain
ground requirements increase linearly (and substantially) with higher RPM/load conditions. It may
be necessary to drive the vehicle under similar RPM/load conditions as when the code set while
taking voltage drop recordings with a "min/max" capable digital volt meter.
Any indications of poorly grounded powertrain assembly should be investigated and corrected prior
to performing any further in-depth repairs.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > TT2008112501 > Nov > 08 > Electrical -
Adjusting Electrical Terminal Pin Tension
Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Adjusting Electrical Terminal Pin
Tension
Model All Model
Number KT2008112501
Area N.America
- Description
This artical provides clarification on proper procedure for adjusting electrical terminal pin tension.
Under no circumstances should the male terminal be twisted, these terminals must remain as
designed, the only pin tension that is being recommended is for the female terminals is where we
want to tighten the pin fit and have the proper alide resistance when completed.
All electrical terminals are in alignment and should never be twisted or angled in an attempt to
repair a connection concern.
This is an improper repair attempt and will be subject to warranty charge-back. Terminals are
twisted.
Depress the plastic locking tab and gently remove the terminal to be adjusted. When removed
adjust the metallic contact tang until proper slide ersistence
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
TT2009032702 > Mar > 09 > Electrical - Stabilant 22A - Application Update
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Stabilant 22A - Application
Update
Number KT2009032702
Area N.America
- Description
Technicians may not be aware of the proper use of Stabilant 22A(R). The product should only be
applied to clean MALE terminals and wait several minutes for the evaporation of the alcohol before
mating the terminals together. To clean the male and female terminals before applying the
Stabilant 22A(R), electrical contact cleaner should be used for best results.
Often a sensor may malfunction with an error message on a diagnostic computer, this can occur
because of a faulty connection to the sensor. So the sensor is is replaced again for the same cause
and the error re-occurs. The removal of the dirt/grease must be performed with electrical contact
cleaner before applying Stabilant 22A(R).
Stabilant 22A(R) is an initially non-conductive block polymer that when used in a thin film with in
the contact switches to a conductive state under the effect of the electrical field. The field gradient
at which this occurs is set such that the material will remain non-conductive between adjacent
contacts in a multiple pin connector environment.
Thus, when applied to electromamechancial contacts, Stabilant 22A(R) provides the connection
reliability of a soldered joint without bonding the contacting surfaces together.
Contacts/terminals are generally the weakest link in any piece of electrical equipment whether it be
an electronic ignition module, automotive computer, electrical connectors, power door
locks/Windows, airbag connectors, or even headlights. The use of Stabilant(R) or its
isopropanol-diluted form Stabilant 22A(R), will make contacts from 10 to 100 times more reliable,
eliminating costly comebacks and ensuring customer satisfaction.
Normally, a film thickness of about 0.5 to 1 mils of the concentrate is more then enough. In other
words, you want just enough to fill up the minute gaps within the contacts. Where Stabilant 22A(R)
is used, be sure to allow for the evaporation of the alcohol which forms 4/5th's of it's volume. It has
been in use in field applications in excess of twelve years now without showing any signs of
reduced effectiveness. The material has a high molecular weight and a very low vapor pressure.
Thus is not prone to losses to evaporation. Unlike some other contact protection oils, Stabilant
22A(R) will not cross-link when exposed to certain material such as high sulfur (free-Maching)
brass alloys or in contact with elastomers containing ultra-accelerators, curing agents or other
cross-linking agents. Thus the phenomenon of "varnishing", so common with some of the oilbased
protective films will not occur with the Stabilant 22A(R) product.
The reason Stabilant 22A(R) is not used on Oxygen sensors is that atmospheric air is referenced
through the wire. There may be a chance wicking can occur and block the outside air reference
giving inaccurate output to the ECU.
http://www.stabilant.com/
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
TT2008112501 > Nov > 08 > Electrical - Adjusting Electrical Terminal Pin Tension
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Adjusting Electrical
Terminal Pin Tension
Model All Model
Number KT2008112501
Area N.America
- Description
This artical provides clarification on proper procedure for adjusting electrical terminal pin tension.
Under no circumstances should the male terminal be twisted, these terminals must remain as
designed, the only pin tension that is being recommended is for the female terminals is where we
want to tighten the pin fit and have the proper alide resistance when completed.
All electrical terminals are in alignment and should never be twisted or angled in an attempt to
repair a connection concern.
This is an improper repair attempt and will be subject to warranty charge-back. Terminals are
twisted.
Depress the plastic locking tab and gently remove the terminal to be adjusted. When removed
adjust the metallic contact tang until proper slide ersistence
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
TT2009032702 > Mar > 09 > Electrical - Stabilant 22A - Application Update
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Stabilant 22A - Application
Update
Number KT2009032702
Area N.America
- Description
Technicians may not be aware of the proper use of Stabilant 22A(R). The product should only be
applied to clean MALE terminals and wait several minutes for the evaporation of the alcohol before
mating the terminals together. To clean the male and female terminals before applying the
Stabilant 22A(R), electrical contact cleaner should be used for best results.
Often a sensor may malfunction with an error message on a diagnostic computer, this can occur
because of a faulty connection to the sensor. So the sensor is is replaced again for the same cause
and the error re-occurs. The removal of the dirt/grease must be performed with electrical contact
cleaner before applying Stabilant 22A(R).
Stabilant 22A(R) is an initially non-conductive block polymer that when used in a thin film with in
the contact switches to a conductive state under the effect of the electrical field. The field gradient
at which this occurs is set such that the material will remain non-conductive between adjacent
contacts in a multiple pin connector environment.
Thus, when applied to electromamechancial contacts, Stabilant 22A(R) provides the connection
reliability of a soldered joint without bonding the contacting surfaces together.
Contacts/terminals are generally the weakest link in any piece of electrical equipment whether it be
an electronic ignition module, automotive computer, electrical connectors, power door
locks/Windows, airbag connectors, or even headlights. The use of Stabilant(R) or its
isopropanol-diluted form Stabilant 22A(R), will make contacts from 10 to 100 times more reliable,
eliminating costly comebacks and ensuring customer satisfaction.
Normally, a film thickness of about 0.5 to 1 mils of the concentrate is more then enough. In other
words, you want just enough to fill up the minute gaps within the contacts. Where Stabilant 22A(R)
is used, be sure to allow for the evaporation of the alcohol which forms 4/5th's of it's volume. It has
been in use in field applications in excess of twelve years now without showing any signs of
reduced effectiveness. The material has a high molecular weight and a very low vapor pressure.
Thus is not prone to losses to evaporation. Unlike some other contact protection oils, Stabilant
22A(R) will not cross-link when exposed to certain material such as high sulfur (free-Maching)
brass alloys or in contact with elastomers containing ultra-accelerators, curing agents or other
cross-linking agents. Thus the phenomenon of "varnishing", so common with some of the oilbased
protective films will not occur with the Stabilant 22A(R) product.
The reason Stabilant 22A(R) is not used on Oxygen sensors is that atmospheric air is referenced
through the wire. There may be a chance wicking can occur and block the outside air reference
giving inaccurate output to the ECU.
http://www.stabilant.com/
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Harness Connectors
Joint Connector
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2166
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2168
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2169
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2170
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2171
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2172
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2173
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2175
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2176
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2177
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views
Diode: Diagrams
Z01 Diode
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Electrical - Cell Chargers Blow Fuse to Accessory Socket
Fuse: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Cell Chargers Blow Fuse to Accessory Socket
Number KT2009112001
Area N.America
Subject Fuse For Power Accessory Socket And Cigar Lighter Blown Due To The Use Of
Aftermarket Cellular Chargers Or Similar Plug In Devices
- Description
Fuse For Power Accessory Socket And Cigar Lighter Blown Due To The Use Of Aftermarket
Cellular Chargers Of Similar Plug In Devices
Customers should be advised against the use of some kinds of inexpensive aftermarket cell phone
chargers (or similar plug in devices) due to their use of a removable in-line fuse which causes
susceptibility to haveing small parts detach and short out across the receptacle terminal. If you
incounter a blown fuse for Power Accessory Socket and Cigar Lighter inquire with the customer as
to which brand of cell phone charger etc. they are currently using and advise them to discontinue
the use where applicable. Parching an approved cell phone charger from their cell phone carrier's
Online or retail store should correct this condition.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Electrical - Cell Chargers Blow Fuse to Accessory Socket > Page 2185
Fuse: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - New Fuse Design on All Vehicles
Number KT2009060301
Area N.America
- Description
This Pitstop publication advises of the use of new fuse designs (for Kia). Some Kia vehicles have
begun to use lower profile fuses then what's been previously used. They currently are difficult to
find outside of O.E.M. parts suppliers. The fuses are industry categorized as Low Profile Fuses,
and come in various types and amperage ratings.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Page 2186
Fuse: Locations
STACK:
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Engine Controls - Powertrain Grounds
Grounding Point: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Powertrain Grounds
Number KT2009083101
Area N.America
- Description
Powertrain Grounds
Upon encountering powertrain DTC's, check that the powertrain main ground is good before
attempting any repairs.
When diagnosing any "P" or "C" Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in which normal diagnostic steps
do not quickly reveal the problem, check that the powertrain assembly is properly grounded to the
body/chassis/battery.
Powertrain assemblies all have at least one ground to body/chassis/battery and in some cases
more. A poorly grounded powertrain assembly does not necessarily produce a "string" of DTC's;
check the connections even if you only retrieve one or two DTC's. Not identifying the poor ground
can (and does) lead to many hours being spent and parts being replaced unneccessarily.
Be aware that a quick voltage drop check between the powertrain and body/chassis/battery while
at engine idle or in the shop under low load conditions may not reveal this concern. Powertrain
ground requirements increase linearly (and substantially) with higher RPM/load conditions. It may
be necessary to drive the vehicle under similar RPM/load conditions as when the code set while
taking voltage drop recordings with a "min/max" capable digital volt meter.
Any indications of poorly grounded powertrain assembly should be investigated and corrected prior
to performing any further in-depth repairs.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > TT2008112501 > Nov > 08 > Electrical - Adjusting Electrical Terminal Pin
Tension
Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Adjusting Electrical Terminal Pin
Tension
Model All Model
Number KT2008112501
Area N.America
- Description
This artical provides clarification on proper procedure for adjusting electrical terminal pin tension.
Under no circumstances should the male terminal be twisted, these terminals must remain as
designed, the only pin tension that is being recommended is for the female terminals is where we
want to tighten the pin fit and have the proper alide resistance when completed.
All electrical terminals are in alignment and should never be twisted or angled in an attempt to
repair a connection concern.
This is an improper repair attempt and will be subject to warranty charge-back. Terminals are
twisted.
Depress the plastic locking tab and gently remove the terminal to be adjusted. When removed
adjust the metallic contact tang until proper slide ersistence
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > TT2009032702 > Mar > 09 >
Electrical - Stabilant 22A - Application Update
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Stabilant 22A - Application
Update
Number KT2009032702
Area N.America
- Description
Technicians may not be aware of the proper use of Stabilant 22A(R). The product should only be
applied to clean MALE terminals and wait several minutes for the evaporation of the alcohol before
mating the terminals together. To clean the male and female terminals before applying the
Stabilant 22A(R), electrical contact cleaner should be used for best results.
Often a sensor may malfunction with an error message on a diagnostic computer, this can occur
because of a faulty connection to the sensor. So the sensor is is replaced again for the same cause
and the error re-occurs. The removal of the dirt/grease must be performed with electrical contact
cleaner before applying Stabilant 22A(R).
Stabilant 22A(R) is an initially non-conductive block polymer that when used in a thin film with in
the contact switches to a conductive state under the effect of the electrical field. The field gradient
at which this occurs is set such that the material will remain non-conductive between adjacent
contacts in a multiple pin connector environment.
Thus, when applied to electromamechancial contacts, Stabilant 22A(R) provides the connection
reliability of a soldered joint without bonding the contacting surfaces together.
Contacts/terminals are generally the weakest link in any piece of electrical equipment whether it be
an electronic ignition module, automotive computer, electrical connectors, power door
locks/Windows, airbag connectors, or even headlights. The use of Stabilant(R) or its
isopropanol-diluted form Stabilant 22A(R), will make contacts from 10 to 100 times more reliable,
eliminating costly comebacks and ensuring customer satisfaction.
Normally, a film thickness of about 0.5 to 1 mils of the concentrate is more then enough. In other
words, you want just enough to fill up the minute gaps within the contacts. Where Stabilant 22A(R)
is used, be sure to allow for the evaporation of the alcohol which forms 4/5th's of it's volume. It has
been in use in field applications in excess of twelve years now without showing any signs of
reduced effectiveness. The material has a high molecular weight and a very low vapor pressure.
Thus is not prone to losses to evaporation. Unlike some other contact protection oils, Stabilant
22A(R) will not cross-link when exposed to certain material such as high sulfur (free-Maching)
brass alloys or in contact with elastomers containing ultra-accelerators, curing agents or other
cross-linking agents. Thus the phenomenon of "varnishing", so common with some of the oilbased
protective films will not occur with the Stabilant 22A(R) product.
The reason Stabilant 22A(R) is not used on Oxygen sensors is that atmospheric air is referenced
through the wire. There may be a chance wicking can occur and block the outside air reference
giving inaccurate output to the ECU.
http://www.stabilant.com/
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > TT2008112501 > Nov > 08 >
Electrical - Adjusting Electrical Terminal Pin Tension
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Adjusting Electrical
Terminal Pin Tension
Model All Model
Number KT2008112501
Area N.America
- Description
This artical provides clarification on proper procedure for adjusting electrical terminal pin tension.
Under no circumstances should the male terminal be twisted, these terminals must remain as
designed, the only pin tension that is being recommended is for the female terminals is where we
want to tighten the pin fit and have the proper alide resistance when completed.
All electrical terminals are in alignment and should never be twisted or angled in an attempt to
repair a connection concern.
This is an improper repair attempt and will be subject to warranty charge-back. Terminals are
twisted.
Depress the plastic locking tab and gently remove the terminal to be adjusted. When removed
adjust the metallic contact tang until proper slide ersistence
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > TT2009032702 > Mar > 09 >
Electrical - Stabilant 22A - Application Update
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Stabilant 22A - Application
Update
Number KT2009032702
Area N.America
- Description
Technicians may not be aware of the proper use of Stabilant 22A(R). The product should only be
applied to clean MALE terminals and wait several minutes for the evaporation of the alcohol before
mating the terminals together. To clean the male and female terminals before applying the
Stabilant 22A(R), electrical contact cleaner should be used for best results.
Often a sensor may malfunction with an error message on a diagnostic computer, this can occur
because of a faulty connection to the sensor. So the sensor is is replaced again for the same cause
and the error re-occurs. The removal of the dirt/grease must be performed with electrical contact
cleaner before applying Stabilant 22A(R).
Stabilant 22A(R) is an initially non-conductive block polymer that when used in a thin film with in
the contact switches to a conductive state under the effect of the electrical field. The field gradient
at which this occurs is set such that the material will remain non-conductive between adjacent
contacts in a multiple pin connector environment.
Thus, when applied to electromamechancial contacts, Stabilant 22A(R) provides the connection
reliability of a soldered joint without bonding the contacting surfaces together.
Contacts/terminals are generally the weakest link in any piece of electrical equipment whether it be
an electronic ignition module, automotive computer, electrical connectors, power door
locks/Windows, airbag connectors, or even headlights. The use of Stabilant(R) or its
isopropanol-diluted form Stabilant 22A(R), will make contacts from 10 to 100 times more reliable,
eliminating costly comebacks and ensuring customer satisfaction.
Normally, a film thickness of about 0.5 to 1 mils of the concentrate is more then enough. In other
words, you want just enough to fill up the minute gaps within the contacts. Where Stabilant 22A(R)
is used, be sure to allow for the evaporation of the alcohol which forms 4/5th's of it's volume. It has
been in use in field applications in excess of twelve years now without showing any signs of
reduced effectiveness. The material has a high molecular weight and a very low vapor pressure.
Thus is not prone to losses to evaporation. Unlike some other contact protection oils, Stabilant
22A(R) will not cross-link when exposed to certain material such as high sulfur (free-Maching)
brass alloys or in contact with elastomers containing ultra-accelerators, curing agents or other
cross-linking agents. Thus the phenomenon of "varnishing", so common with some of the oilbased
protective films will not occur with the Stabilant 22A(R) product.
The reason Stabilant 22A(R) is not used on Oxygen sensors is that atmospheric air is referenced
through the wire. There may be a chance wicking can occur and block the outside air reference
giving inaccurate output to the ECU.
http://www.stabilant.com/
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > Harness Connectors
Joint Connector
GROUP Chassis
NUMBER 032
MODEL ALL
SUBJECT:
This bulletin provides 2011 model year alignment specifications as well as diagnosis and best
practices tips.
2. Alignment Basics
IMPORTANT:
^ Before and after alignment print outs are required to be submitted with all vehicle drift or pull
warranty alignment claims.
^ Before performing an alignment, check to ensure all tires are set to the specified pressure.
^ Ensure the vehicle is carrying a typical load (not heavily loaded, which will alter alignment once
the load is removed or changed).
^ Optima (IF), Sportage (SL) and Forte (ID) vehicles are equipped with electric power steering
(MDPS - Motor Driven Power Steering). Perform an absolute steering position (ASP) calibration
using GDS after the alignment is completed.
^ Refer to the following alignment specifications or KGIS for 2011 model year specifications.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2281
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2282
Alignment Specifications:
CAMBER:
Camber is the inclination of the centerline of the wheel from the vertical as viewed from the front of
the vehicle. The camber angle will affect the wear on the inner or outer edge of the tire.
A tire with positive camber can influence the vehicle with a directional pull. The vehicle will go
towards the side that has the tire with the most positive
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2283
camber.
CASTER:
Caster is the angle between an imaginary line drawn through the upper and lower steering pivots
and a line perpendicular to the road surface (viewed from side of vehicle).
If the top of the line tilts rearward, the vehicle is said to have "POSITIVE" caster.
If the top of the line tilts forward, the vehicle is said to have "NEGATIVE" caster.
Caster will not cause tire wear unless extreme maladjustment or worn parts are involved.
TOE:
Toe is the difference between the leading edge (or front) and trailing edge (or rear) of the tires.
Toe-in is the measurement in fractions of an inch millimeters or decimal of degrees that the tires
are closer together in the front than they are in the back.
Toe-out is the same measurement, except the tires are further apart in the front than in the rear.
Vehicle drift or pull can be attributed to several factors. Understanding what can affect it is
imperative for anyone repairing a vehicle with a drift or pull condition. Most of these factors are
directly measureable using tools commonly found in any repair shop like tire pressure gauges,
alignment racks, and wheel balancers.
1. Air pressure - Low or uneven tire pressure can cause a vehicle to drift or pull towards that tire
with the lowest pressure. Remember that cold tires
register slightly lower pressure than tires that are warm from usage. Ensure that all tires are
correctly inflated.
2. Alignment
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2284
a. Camber - A vehicle will drift or pull towards the side with more positive front camber. Camber
difference between the front tires greater than 0.5
b. Caster - A vehicle will drift or pull towards the side with the least positive caster.
c. Steering Axis Inclination (SAI) - The angle formed by the line drawn through the steering pivot
axis and a line at true vertical when viewed from
the front of the vehicle. SAI is designed into a vehicle's suspension and aids straight-line stability.
This angle can be measured by the alignment machine. For Hunter units, it is measured during the
caster sweep process. It is useful for checking for damaged components when the SAI difference
between left and right sides is more than 1 degree. If SAI is lower on one side of the vehicle it may
indicate a bent lower control arm. If SAI is higher on one side of the vehicle it may indicate damage
to the upper strut mount.
d. Thrust angle - This is the direction the rear axle is pointing as a result of the rear toe angles and
results in the steering wheel being off-center. To
avoid this situation, rear camber and toe should be adjusted before the front when performing a
four wheel alignment. After the rear is set, center the steering wheel, lock it in place, then adjust the
front camber, caster, and toe (if applicable).
3. Tires - Tires can have significant effect on vehicle drift or pull for the following reasons:
a. Ply steer - Ply steer is an inherent characteristic in a tire which results in a lateral force as the tire
rolls. Rotating the tires from side to side may aid
in cancelling out the effects of ply steer and can aid in diagnosing a ply steer concern.
b. Conicity - Tire conicity refers to the shape of the tire and how cone shaped it is. This can
influence vehicle drift or pull. Conicity can be present in
a new tire due to manufacturing, or in a used tire due to camber wear. Rotating tires may reduce a
vehicle pull concern due to tire conicity.
4. Road Crown - Road Crown is the slope of a road surface to ensure proper drainage. Excessive
Road Crown can cause a vehicle to drift to the low
5. Cross Wind - Excessive cross winds can cause a vehicle to pull or drift. If the Winds are
excessive it can skew the test results.
Other issues can cause vehicle drift or pull, such as brake drag, spring sag resulting in ride height
differences, cargo load/weight distribution, and more. It is important to consider all potential effects
when diagnosing and confirming a vehicle drift or pull condition. Understanding the factors that
affect vehicle drift or pull can help to determine the root cause.
1. Before test driving, verify that all tires are OE, correctly installed (directional tires) and set to the
correct inflation pressure.
3. Two passes should be made to validate the concern at different speeds. Approach the test road
section and drive through at 40 and at 50 MPH.
Center the steering wheel, then slightly turn (~3 degrees) steering wheel to the left and to the right
to get a feel for centeredness. Hold the steering wheel with a light touch on center.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2286
4. Note the direction towards which the vehicle has a tendency to drift or pull. If the vehicle tends to
go left, place the vehicle on the right side of the
lane. If the vehicle tends to go right, place the vehicle on the left side of lane, as shown.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2287
5. Take two time measurements. First, time how long it takes for the vehicle to move from one
edge to the other edge (case 1), as shown. Second, time
how long it takes for the vehicle to move across one complete lane (case 2), as shown. Use the
conditions in the table below to confirm drifting or pulling condition.
2. Ensure the lift is level so vehicle's suspension and steering are in a neutral position.
3. Set the target levels before rolling compensation. After completing the compensation, do not
re-level the targets.
4. Roll the vehicle by turning the left rear tire. This will not disturb the vehicle's suspension and
steering systems. Do not roll the vehicle by pushing or
5. Ensure the pins are in the slip plates, and the Turnplate Bridge is flush with the rolling surface to
minimize the vehicle's suspension movement.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2289
Slip Plates - The slip plates of a Hunter alignment rack are designed to move smoothly and freely
to provide accurate measurements. Before pulling a vehicle onto the rack, check that they move
freely and do not bind. Periodically clean the area underneath the slip plates by blowing
compressed air through to remove any debris. If this does not free a binding plate, contact your
local Hunter representative for cleaning and lubrication recommendations.
StraightTrak LFM feature (Road Force Balance) - StraightTrak (Road Force Balance) is an optional
feature for Hunter's GSP9700 wheel balancer. This feature measures lateral force of a tire due to
ply steer, conicity, and other issues which may contribute to vehicle drift or pull. This can be a
useful tool for vehicles with multiple conditions.
Use StraightTrak (Road Force Balance) to arrange the 4 wheel/tire assemblies of a vehicle in a
configuration which will result in the lowest drifting or pulling force by doing the following:
2. Balance the front left assembly on the Hunter GSP97OO with StraightTrak feature. An icon
located in the lower right corner will show whether or
3. After balancing, press the tire tag button to assign a number to that assembly. Label the
assembly accordingly with a tag or chalk mark.
4. Continue to balance and tag all four assemblies. After all are completed, the screen will show
how different placement positioning of the assemblies
will affect vehicle drift or pull or vibration. Select "Show Least Pull."
5. The arrow on the top of the screen indicates how much drift or pulling force exists with the tires
in that configuration. Install the wheel/tire
assemblies to those positions on the vehicle to achieve the least amount of tire-induced drift or pull.
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line
TPMS
Number KT2008092302
Area N.America
- Description
Diagnosing TRW/Lear Low Line Tire Pressure Monitoring warning light ON conditions with certain
Diagnostic Trouble Codes stored in Memory requires particular attention. The following procedure
can assist in proper diagnosis for the wheel sensor concerns.
^ Install TPMS tool to diagnose DTC's, retrieve DTC C1313, C1312, etc.
^ Using the worksheet record sensor ID for all Four (4) Sensors from the "Current data" Screen.
^ Ping each wheel and record these sensor ID's on the worksheet.
^ Match wheel sensor ID, against the ID recorded from the exciter tool/ECU. The missing sensor ID
should be checked for correct setting and battery
DO NOT replace or diagnose components in a position based on the DTC information. Always
locate the sensor ID on the vehicle with the hand-tool. A commen mistake is Code C1312 is set
and the technical replaces that sensor thinking it was in the left Front, the wheel and tire may be
located in the Right Rear. When and it the tires are rotated the original configuration is no longer
valid.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor
System - Diagnosing Low Line TPMS > Page 2309
TPMS Wheel Sensor Worksheet
^ If the Lamp shown above is ON: Check tire pressure and check for causes of low pressure.
^ Verify wheel sensor ID's in the ECU module corresponds to all 4 sensors on the vehicle - if not,
reprogram the sensors on the vehicle into the ECU
module.
^ Verify that the ECU module and all 4 wheel sensors have the mode and state configured correctly
- if not, correct this condition first. - This applies to
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor
System - Diagnosing Low Line TPMS > Page 2310
^ Excessive aftermarket wiring tie-wrapped and coiled on or near TPMS module. This may create a
magnetic field causing concern.
^ If all wheel sensor ID's, Mode and State are correct as initially received and you cannot identify
any interfearence as listed above and the problem
Wheel sensor to ECU communication takes place every 3 minutes, 20 seconds for TRW systems
and every 3 minutes for Lear systems unless rapid tire deflation is occuring. Be sure to wait this
amount of time for the values to populate on the Current Data Screen.
ROAD TEST:
To verify your repair drive the vehicle at or above 20 MPH for 20 minutes, if speed goes below 20
MPH during Auto-Learn (TRW only), the process is halted until speed is above threshold again.
Auto-Learn (TRW only), is not recommended, use exciter tool each time to program the sensor ID's
into the receiver module.
The warning light shown above = indicates Low tire pressure problem, use exciter tool and match
tire pressure on-screen value against your tire pressure gauge reading. The tire pressures should
be set COLD.
The warning light shown above = indicates a problem with the Wheel sensors, TPMS module, radio
frequency interfearence or related wiring. Use Exciter too to diagnose.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor
System - Diagnosing Low Line TPMS > Page 2312
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Outside Radio Signals
Affects TPMS
Number KT2008092201
Area N.America
- Description
KMA has received several inquires reguarding TPMS light ON with or without Stored Diagnostic
Trouble Codes in Memory. The following listed components/conditions may cause the control unit
and wheel sensor communication to be interrupted and may cause multiple DTC's.
NOTE:
Always use the correct part for the proper model year and production range, failure to do so may
result in vehicles which are difficult to repair and can be subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Excessive aftermarket wiring tie-wrapped and coiled on or near TPMS module. This may create a
magnetic field causing concern.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine/A/T - Flushing Systems Not Recommended
Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/A/T - Flushing Systems Not
Recommended
Number KT2008082501
Area N.America
- Description
Vehicles produced by Kia Motors Corporation do not require the Engine, Transmission, "Power
Steering and Cooling System to be power flushed. Kia vehicles are designed to give thousands of
miles of trouble free service if all recommended maintenance intervals are followed by the
customer with a simple drain and refill. The use of fluid flush exchangers is not required nor
recommended by Kia.
^ Flush systems add unnecessary maintenance expense not required by the manufacture to
maintain the warranty.
^ Flush systems can leave behind solvents and residue which can degrade the new replaced
lubricant, also can degrade the seals and gaskets
intervals.
* Kia does recommend flushing the oil cooler during A/T replacement, refer to the appropriate
Transmission TSB.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2319
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
The EPS (Electric Power Steering) system uses an electric motor to assist the steering force and is
an engine operation independent steering system requiring no fluid.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Power Steering Oil Pump Noise
Power Steering Pump: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Power Steering Oil Pump
Noise
Number KT2008092301
Area N.America
- Description
When replacing a power steering oil pump or inspecting a vehicle for a customer concern with
power steering whine noise, inspect the filter screen in the power steering reservoir for
contamination. If the filter screen has debris the fluid will be restricted from supplying the power
steering pump[ and may cause the fluid to aerate and cause a whine noise.
If debris or dirt is found in the reservoir filter screen, the reservoir should be replaced.
Tech TIP: It may be necessary to empty the power steering reservoir to properly inspect the filter
screen for contamination.
^ PSF-III is not available through Kia Chemicals: Use a high quality power steering fluid like
Valvoline(R) or equivalent, DO NOT use ATF in place of
GROUP Chassis
NUMBER 032
MODEL ALL
SUBJECT:
This bulletin provides 2011 model year alignment specifications as well as diagnosis and best
practices tips.
2. Alignment Basics
IMPORTANT:
^ Before and after alignment print outs are required to be submitted with all vehicle drift or pull
warranty alignment claims.
^ Before performing an alignment, check to ensure all tires are set to the specified pressure.
^ Ensure the vehicle is carrying a typical load (not heavily loaded, which will alter alignment once
the load is removed or changed).
^ Optima (IF), Sportage (SL) and Forte (ID) vehicles are equipped with electric power steering
(MDPS - Motor Driven Power Steering). Perform an absolute steering position (ASP) calibration
using GDS after the alignment is completed.
^ Refer to the following alignment specifications or KGIS for 2011 model year specifications.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2341
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2342
Alignment Specifications:
CAMBER:
Camber is the inclination of the centerline of the wheel from the vertical as viewed from the front of
the vehicle. The camber angle will affect the wear on the inner or outer edge of the tire.
A tire with positive camber can influence the vehicle with a directional pull. The vehicle will go
towards the side that has the tire with the most positive
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2343
camber.
CASTER:
Caster is the angle between an imaginary line drawn through the upper and lower steering pivots
and a line perpendicular to the road surface (viewed from side of vehicle).
If the top of the line tilts rearward, the vehicle is said to have "POSITIVE" caster.
If the top of the line tilts forward, the vehicle is said to have "NEGATIVE" caster.
Caster will not cause tire wear unless extreme maladjustment or worn parts are involved.
TOE:
Toe is the difference between the leading edge (or front) and trailing edge (or rear) of the tires.
Toe-in is the measurement in fractions of an inch millimeters or decimal of degrees that the tires
are closer together in the front than they are in the back.
Toe-out is the same measurement, except the tires are further apart in the front than in the rear.
Vehicle drift or pull can be attributed to several factors. Understanding what can affect it is
imperative for anyone repairing a vehicle with a drift or pull condition. Most of these factors are
directly measureable using tools commonly found in any repair shop like tire pressure gauges,
alignment racks, and wheel balancers.
1. Air pressure - Low or uneven tire pressure can cause a vehicle to drift or pull towards that tire
with the lowest pressure. Remember that cold tires
register slightly lower pressure than tires that are warm from usage. Ensure that all tires are
correctly inflated.
2. Alignment
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2344
a. Camber - A vehicle will drift or pull towards the side with more positive front camber. Camber
difference between the front tires greater than 0.5
b. Caster - A vehicle will drift or pull towards the side with the least positive caster.
c. Steering Axis Inclination (SAI) - The angle formed by the line drawn through the steering pivot
axis and a line at true vertical when viewed from
the front of the vehicle. SAI is designed into a vehicle's suspension and aids straight-line stability.
This angle can be measured by the alignment machine. For Hunter units, it is measured during the
caster sweep process. It is useful for checking for damaged components when the SAI difference
between left and right sides is more than 1 degree. If SAI is lower on one side of the vehicle it may
indicate a bent lower control arm. If SAI is higher on one side of the vehicle it may indicate damage
to the upper strut mount.
d. Thrust angle - This is the direction the rear axle is pointing as a result of the rear toe angles and
results in the steering wheel being off-center. To
avoid this situation, rear camber and toe should be adjusted before the front when performing a
four wheel alignment. After the rear is set, center the steering wheel, lock it in place, then adjust the
front camber, caster, and toe (if applicable).
3. Tires - Tires can have significant effect on vehicle drift or pull for the following reasons:
a. Ply steer - Ply steer is an inherent characteristic in a tire which results in a lateral force as the tire
rolls. Rotating the tires from side to side may aid
in cancelling out the effects of ply steer and can aid in diagnosing a ply steer concern.
b. Conicity - Tire conicity refers to the shape of the tire and how cone shaped it is. This can
influence vehicle drift or pull. Conicity can be present in
a new tire due to manufacturing, or in a used tire due to camber wear. Rotating tires may reduce a
vehicle pull concern due to tire conicity.
4. Road Crown - Road Crown is the slope of a road surface to ensure proper drainage. Excessive
Road Crown can cause a vehicle to drift to the low
5. Cross Wind - Excessive cross winds can cause a vehicle to pull or drift. If the Winds are
excessive it can skew the test results.
Other issues can cause vehicle drift or pull, such as brake drag, spring sag resulting in ride height
differences, cargo load/weight distribution, and more. It is important to consider all potential effects
when diagnosing and confirming a vehicle drift or pull condition. Understanding the factors that
affect vehicle drift or pull can help to determine the root cause.
1. Before test driving, verify that all tires are OE, correctly installed (directional tires) and set to the
correct inflation pressure.
3. Two passes should be made to validate the concern at different speeds. Approach the test road
section and drive through at 40 and at 50 MPH.
Center the steering wheel, then slightly turn (~3 degrees) steering wheel to the left and to the right
to get a feel for centeredness. Hold the steering wheel with a light touch on center.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2346
4. Note the direction towards which the vehicle has a tendency to drift or pull. If the vehicle tends to
go left, place the vehicle on the right side of the
lane. If the vehicle tends to go right, place the vehicle on the left side of lane, as shown.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2347
5. Take two time measurements. First, time how long it takes for the vehicle to move from one
edge to the other edge (case 1), as shown. Second, time
how long it takes for the vehicle to move across one complete lane (case 2), as shown. Use the
conditions in the table below to confirm drifting or pulling condition.
2. Ensure the lift is level so vehicle's suspension and steering are in a neutral position.
3. Set the target levels before rolling compensation. After completing the compensation, do not
re-level the targets.
4. Roll the vehicle by turning the left rear tire. This will not disturb the vehicle's suspension and
steering systems. Do not roll the vehicle by pushing or
5. Ensure the pins are in the slip plates, and the Turnplate Bridge is flush with the rolling surface to
minimize the vehicle's suspension movement.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Steering/Suspension - Alignment Specs/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2349
Slip Plates - The slip plates of a Hunter alignment rack are designed to move smoothly and freely
to provide accurate measurements. Before pulling a vehicle onto the rack, check that they move
freely and do not bind. Periodically clean the area underneath the slip plates by blowing
compressed air through to remove any debris. If this does not free a binding plate, contact your
local Hunter representative for cleaning and lubrication recommendations.
StraightTrak LFM feature (Road Force Balance) - StraightTrak (Road Force Balance) is an optional
feature for Hunter's GSP9700 wheel balancer. This feature measures lateral force of a tire due to
ply steer, conicity, and other issues which may contribute to vehicle drift or pull. This can be a
useful tool for vehicles with multiple conditions.
Use StraightTrak (Road Force Balance) to arrange the 4 wheel/tire assemblies of a vehicle in a
configuration which will result in the lowest drifting or pulling force by doing the following:
2. Balance the front left assembly on the Hunter GSP97OO with StraightTrak feature. An icon
located in the lower right corner will show whether or
3. After balancing, press the tire tag button to assign a number to that assembly. Label the
assembly accordingly with a tag or chalk mark.
4. Continue to balance and tag all four assemblies. After all are completed, the screen will show
how different placement positioning of the assemblies
will affect vehicle drift or pull or vibration. Select "Show Least Pull."
5. The arrow on the top of the screen indicates how much drift or pulling force exists with the tires
in that configuration. Install the wheel/tire
assemblies to those positions on the vehicle to achieve the least amount of tire-induced drift or pull.
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line
TPMS
Number KT2008092302
Area N.America
- Description
Diagnosing TRW/Lear Low Line Tire Pressure Monitoring warning light ON conditions with certain
Diagnostic Trouble Codes stored in Memory requires particular attention. The following procedure
can assist in proper diagnosis for the wheel sensor concerns.
^ Install TPMS tool to diagnose DTC's, retrieve DTC C1313, C1312, etc.
^ Using the worksheet record sensor ID for all Four (4) Sensors from the "Current data" Screen.
^ Ping each wheel and record these sensor ID's on the worksheet.
^ Match wheel sensor ID, against the ID recorded from the exciter tool/ECU. The missing sensor ID
should be checked for correct setting and battery
DO NOT replace or diagnose components in a position based on the DTC information. Always
locate the sensor ID on the vehicle with the hand-tool. A commen mistake is Code C1312 is set
and the technical replaces that sensor thinking it was in the left Front, the wheel and tire may be
located in the Right Rear. When and it the tires are rotated the original configuration is no longer
valid.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line
TPMS > Page 2363
TPMS Wheel Sensor Worksheet
^ If the Lamp shown above is ON: Check tire pressure and check for causes of low pressure.
^ Verify wheel sensor ID's in the ECU module corresponds to all 4 sensors on the vehicle - if not,
reprogram the sensors on the vehicle into the ECU
module.
^ Verify that the ECU module and all 4 wheel sensors have the mode and state configured correctly
- if not, correct this condition first. - This applies to
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line
TPMS > Page 2364
^ Excessive aftermarket wiring tie-wrapped and coiled on or near TPMS module. This may create a
magnetic field causing concern.
^ If all wheel sensor ID's, Mode and State are correct as initially received and you cannot identify
any interfearence as listed above and the problem
Wheel sensor to ECU communication takes place every 3 minutes, 20 seconds for TRW systems
and every 3 minutes for Lear systems unless rapid tire deflation is occuring. Be sure to wait this
amount of time for the values to populate on the Current Data Screen.
ROAD TEST:
To verify your repair drive the vehicle at or above 20 MPH for 20 minutes, if speed goes below 20
MPH during Auto-Learn (TRW only), the process is halted until speed is above threshold again.
Auto-Learn (TRW only), is not recommended, use exciter tool each time to program the sensor ID's
into the receiver module.
The warning light shown above = indicates Low tire pressure problem, use exciter tool and match
tire pressure on-screen value against your tire pressure gauge reading. The tire pressures should
be set COLD.
The warning light shown above = indicates a problem with the Wheel sensors, TPMS module, radio
frequency interfearence or related wiring. Use Exciter too to diagnose.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line
TPMS > Page 2366
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Outside Radio Signals
Affects TPMS
Number KT2008092201
Area N.America
- Description
KMA has received several inquires reguarding TPMS light ON with or without Stored Diagnostic
Trouble Codes in Memory. The following listed components/conditions may cause the control unit
and wheel sensor communication to be interrupted and may cause multiple DTC's.
NOTE:
Always use the correct part for the proper model year and production range, failure to do so may
result in vehicles which are difficult to repair and can be subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Excessive aftermarket wiring tie-wrapped and coiled on or near TPMS module. This may create a
magnetic field causing concern.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure
Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitoring System - Low Pressure Warning Lamp
On
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitoring System - Low Pressure
Warning Lamp On
Number KT2009021301
Area N.America
- Description
A recent review of warranty claim data has indicated that many dealers are writing repair orders
and entering unnecessary claims related to normal TPMS system operation. The Tire Pressure
Monitoring System was developed as an important safety feature to alert customers to low air
pressure in one or more of their tires, prompting them to check and adjust their tire pressure at the
nearest service station or other similar facility. Occasionally, due to a customer's lack of familiarity
with the TPMS system and a conditioned response to bring the vehicle in to their serviceing dealer
for any warning lamp concern, you may be presented with a vehicle which has the Tread Lamp
illuminated due to low tire pressure on a normally operating TPMS system. Service advisers and
other dealership personal should screen for all such types of customer complaints and not begin
writing a repair order due to a low tire pressure warning lamp (Tread Lamp) in the absence of any
TPMS Malfunction Indicator Lamp (TPMS Lamp) illuminated. Assist the customer in checking and
adding air to the tires as necessary during their first visit for the low air pressure light on and
provide them with a copy of the tri-fold Kia TPMS Brochure P/N UN050-KU-001.
A warranty claim should not be filed for any complaint related to low tire pressure and may result in
a debit being applied to your dealership during the normal claims review process.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module >
Component Information > Locations
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line
TPMS
Number KT2008092302
Area N.America
- Description
Diagnosing TRW/Lear Low Line Tire Pressure Monitoring warning light ON conditions with certain
Diagnostic Trouble Codes stored in Memory requires particular attention. The following procedure
can assist in proper diagnosis for the wheel sensor concerns.
^ Install TPMS tool to diagnose DTC's, retrieve DTC C1313, C1312, etc.
^ Using the worksheet record sensor ID for all Four (4) Sensors from the "Current data" Screen.
^ Ping each wheel and record these sensor ID's on the worksheet.
^ Match wheel sensor ID, against the ID recorded from the exciter tool/ECU. The missing sensor ID
should be checked for correct setting and battery
DO NOT replace or diagnose components in a position based on the DTC information. Always
locate the sensor ID on the vehicle with the hand-tool. A commen mistake is Code C1312 is set
and the technical replaces that sensor thinking it was in the left Front, the wheel and tire may be
located in the Right Rear. When and it the tires are rotated the original configuration is no longer
valid.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line TPMS > Page 2380
TPMS Wheel Sensor Worksheet
^ If the Lamp shown above is ON: Check tire pressure and check for causes of low pressure.
^ Verify wheel sensor ID's in the ECU module corresponds to all 4 sensors on the vehicle - if not,
reprogram the sensors on the vehicle into the ECU
module.
^ Verify that the ECU module and all 4 wheel sensors have the mode and state configured correctly
- if not, correct this condition first. - This applies to
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line TPMS > Page 2381
^ Excessive aftermarket wiring tie-wrapped and coiled on or near TPMS module. This may create a
magnetic field causing concern.
^ If all wheel sensor ID's, Mode and State are correct as initially received and you cannot identify
any interfearence as listed above and the problem
Wheel sensor to ECU communication takes place every 3 minutes, 20 seconds for TRW systems
and every 3 minutes for Lear systems unless rapid tire deflation is occuring. Be sure to wait this
amount of time for the values to populate on the Current Data Screen.
ROAD TEST:
To verify your repair drive the vehicle at or above 20 MPH for 20 minutes, if speed goes below 20
MPH during Auto-Learn (TRW only), the process is halted until speed is above threshold again.
Auto-Learn (TRW only), is not recommended, use exciter tool each time to program the sensor ID's
into the receiver module.
The warning light shown above = indicates Low tire pressure problem, use exciter tool and match
tire pressure on-screen value against your tire pressure gauge reading. The tire pressures should
be set COLD.
The warning light shown above = indicates a problem with the Wheel sensors, TPMS module, radio
frequency interfearence or related wiring. Use Exciter too to diagnose.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line TPMS > Page 2383
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Outside Radio Signals
Affects TPMS
Number KT2008092201
Area N.America
- Description
KMA has received several inquires reguarding TPMS light ON with or without Stored Diagnostic
Trouble Codes in Memory. The following listed components/conditions may cause the control unit
and wheel sensor communication to be interrupted and may cause multiple DTC's.
NOTE:
Always use the correct part for the proper model year and production range, failure to do so may
result in vehicles which are difficult to repair and can be subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Excessive aftermarket wiring tie-wrapped and coiled on or near TPMS module. This may create a
magnetic field causing concern.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Mode Actuator
Blower Motor Resistor: Diagrams FET (Field Effect Transistor) (Auto A/C)
GROUP Climate
NUMBER 015
This bulletin provides information relating to potential air conditioning compressor noises or leaks
on some 2011 Model Year Sportage (SL) vehicles produced from May 2010 (start of 2011 MY
production) - July 30, 2010 and in dealer stock at the time of TSB release. A visual inspection will
be required to ensure there are no A/C compressor PAG oil leaks Follow the procedure outlined
below to check the climate control system for proper operation and any abnormal noises. Kia is
requesting the completion of this Service Action on all affected 2011 MY Sportages in dealer stock
prior to delivery.
NOTICE
This bulletin offers only the inspection procedure. if a defect in the climate control system is
defective after performing the inspection procedure outlined in this bulletin, repair (replace) the
defective component.
NOTICE
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCs (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > Not Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select report).
The issue number is SA062.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Recalls for Compressor HVAC: > CLI015 > Oct > 10 > Campaign SA062 - A/C Compressor Noise/Leaks > Page
2426
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Recalls for Compressor HVAC: > CLI015 > Oct > 10 > Campaign SA062 - A/C Compressor Noise/Leaks > Page
2427
Climate Control Inspection Procedure
AFFECTED PRODUCTION RANGE
NOTICE
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Recalls for Compressor HVAC: > CLI015 > Oct > 10 > Campaign SA062 - A/C Compressor Noise/Leaks > Page
2428
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
SA062 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Compressor HVAC: > CLI015 > Oct > 10 > Campaign SA062 - A/C
Compressor Noise/Leaks
Compressor HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA062 - A/C Compressor
Noise/Leaks
GROUP Climate
NUMBER 015
This bulletin provides information relating to potential air conditioning compressor noises or leaks
on some 2011 Model Year Sportage (SL) vehicles produced from May 2010 (start of 2011 MY
production) - July 30, 2010 and in dealer stock at the time of TSB release. A visual inspection will
be required to ensure there are no A/C compressor PAG oil leaks Follow the procedure outlined
below to check the climate control system for proper operation and any abnormal noises. Kia is
requesting the completion of this Service Action on all affected 2011 MY Sportages in dealer stock
prior to delivery.
NOTICE
This bulletin offers only the inspection procedure. if a defect in the climate control system is
defective after performing the inspection procedure outlined in this bulletin, repair (replace) the
defective component.
NOTICE
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCs (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > Not Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select report).
NOTICE
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Compressor HVAC: > CLI015 > Oct > 10 > Campaign SA062 - A/C
Compressor Noise/Leaks > Page 2436
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only. Kia retailers should reference
SA062 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2437
CHG19 Condenser
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Condenser Fan: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2448
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2450
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2451
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2452
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2453
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2454
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2455
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2457
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2458
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations >
A/C Control Module (Manual)
EMS Box
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > System Relay, HVAC >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2499
EMS Box View
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor /
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations
EMS Box
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > System Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2527
EMS Box View
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Restraint System - Air Bag Code B2500
Air Bag: Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - Air Bag Code B2500
Group Restraints(81)
Number KT2008090301
Area N.America
- Description
KMA has found in some cases that Airbag Control Modules (ACM's) have been replaced for DTC
B2500. B2500 sets when there are faults in the airbag warning lamp circuit. This code may also set
by lower then normal battery voltage, such is the case of a dead or discharged battery.
When investigating DTC B2500, before diagnosing the airbag warning circuit, first check if the
battery voltage had dropped in sequence with code B2500 being set. Ask the customer if the
vehicle had been jumped started, or check if the battery had been replaced recently. If battery
voltage was or is not the concern, then check the airbag warning lamp circuit throughly.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Air
Bag
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Driver Curtain Air Bag (With Rollover Sensor)
Side Air Bag: Diagrams Driver Curtain Air Bag (With Rollover Sensor)
Side Air Bag: Diagrams Passenger Curtain Air Bag (With Rollover Sensor)
Head Restraint System: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat/Seat Cover/Seat Belt
Modification Info.
GROUP GEN
NUMBER 050
Kia Dealers may receive inquiries from customers about aftermarket seat covers re-upholstering
seats and/or questions related to modifications of seats seat covers seat belts etc. To assist
dealers in responding properly to these inquires Kia is providing the following information:
Kia's current Owners Manuals contain a number of very specific Instructions Cautions and
Warnings in Section 3; Safety Features Of Your Vehicle. The pages of that section provide
information about the use and care of Seat Belts and components of the Secondary Restraint
System (SRS); Air Bags Side Air Bags and Occupant Detection Systems (ODS). Note that the
Owner's Manuals include the following statement:
The Owner's Manuals contain specific warnings against making any modifications to the SRS, Air
Bags/Side Air Bags or related systems or structures. Additionally the Owner's Manual specifically
cautions against the use of seat covers, after market seat heaters etc. and informs how their use
may influence the operation of the Air Bag/Side Air Bag or ODS systems.
Should customers inquire about the possible installation of seat covers, aftermarket (re)upholstery
or otherwise request information about making any changes or modifications to the restraint
systems, please refer them to Section 3 of the Owner's Manual and review the appropriate
paragraphs with them.
Sample page excerpts from 2011 MY Optima shown below; other models are similar.
For complete information and full details always refer to the appropriate Owner's Manual.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
Seat Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat/Seat Cover/Seat Belt Modification Info.
GROUP GEN
NUMBER 050
Kia Dealers may receive inquiries from customers about aftermarket seat covers re-upholstering
seats and/or questions related to modifications of seats seat covers seat belts etc. To assist
dealers in responding properly to these inquires Kia is providing the following information:
Kia's current Owners Manuals contain a number of very specific Instructions Cautions and
Warnings in Section 3; Safety Features Of Your Vehicle. The pages of that section provide
information about the use and care of Seat Belts and components of the Secondary Restraint
System (SRS); Air Bags Side Air Bags and Occupant Detection Systems (ODS). Note that the
Owner's Manuals include the following statement:
The Owner's Manuals contain specific warnings against making any modifications to the SRS, Air
Bags/Side Air Bags or related systems or structures. Additionally the Owner's Manual specifically
cautions against the use of seat covers, after market seat heaters etc. and informs how their use
may influence the operation of the Air Bag/Side Air Bag or ODS systems.
Should customers inquire about the possible installation of seat covers, aftermarket (re)upholstery
or otherwise request information about making any changes or modifications to the restraint
systems, please refer them to Section 3 of the Owner's Manual and review the appropriate
paragraphs with them.
Sample page excerpts from 2011 MY Optima shown below; other models are similar.
For complete information and full details always refer to the appropriate Owner's Manual.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Page 2594
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Driver Curtain Air Bag (With Rollover Sensor)
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Page 2630
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Passenger Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Keyless Entry Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit
Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry
Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 2675
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry
Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 2676
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > BOD070 > Sep
> 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
Keyless Entry Module: Recalls Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > BOD070 > Sep
> 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 2684
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > BOD070 > Sep
> 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 2685
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2687
Keyless Start Control Module: Recalls Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for
Keyless Start Control Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page
2708
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for
Keyless Start Control Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page
2709
MANUAL UPGRADE PROCEDURE USING THE GDS
1. Within the ECU Upgrade screen select Manual Mode in the left column then select the
appropriate Upgrade Event #137 Select the appropriate control unit part number with reference to
the ROM ID Information Table; then click OK.
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Keyless Start Control Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software
Update
Keyless Start Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R)
Unit Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Keyless Start Control Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software
Update > Page 2717
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Keyless Start Control Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software
Update > Page 2718
MANUAL UPGRADE PROCEDURE USING THE GDS
1. Within the ECU Upgrade screen select Manual Mode in the left column then select the
appropriate Upgrade Event #137 Select the appropriate control unit part number with reference to
the ROM ID Information Table; then click OK.
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Keyless Start Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 2722
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 2724
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 2725
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 2726
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 2727
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 2728
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 2729
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 2731
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 2732
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 2733
Keyless Start Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
SD954-3 Smart Key Module System (1)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 2734
SD954-4 Smart Key Module System (2)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 2735
SD954-5 Smart Key Module System (3)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 2736
SD954-6 Smart Key Module System (4)
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by SD number (i.e SD130-4, etc.) within these diagrams can
be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be
found via the photo number at the vehicle level under Locations by Photo Number. See:
Locations/Component Locations
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Systems -
Smart Key Programming Information
Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Smart Key Programming
Information
GROUP GEN
NUMBER 048
SUBJECT: SMART KEY PROGRAMING PROCEDURES WHEN BOTH SMART KEYS ARE LOST
This bulletin provides programming information for vehicles for which both Smart Keys are missing
Without a Smart Key the vehicle will not power up Please follow the programming procedure
outlined in this bulletin when replacing both Smart Keys.
*NOTICE
If it is determined that a customer has lost both Smart Keys, then the customer will be responsible
for the cost or replacement Smart Keys.
Programming Procedure:
The screen shown above is for demonstrative purposes only and will vary depending on model.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Systems -
Smart Key Programming Information > Page 2741
3. Select PIC for the system, and then the Smart Key Unit.
Press OK.
5. Neutralize all three modules. PIN codes must be entered, (PIN codes can be found on KGIS).
6. Once all three modules have been neutralized, select System to change to PIC System Code
Saving.
8. Insert a NEW Smart Key into the holder in the center armrest as per the on screen prompt.
Press OK
*NOTICE
NUMBER 048
SUBJECT: SMART KEY PROGRAMING PROCEDURES WHEN BOTH SMART KEYS ARE LOST
This bulletin provides programming information for vehicles for which both Smart Keys are missing
Without a Smart Key the vehicle will not power up Please follow the programming procedure
outlined in this bulletin when replacing both Smart Keys.
*NOTICE
If it is determined that a customer has lost both Smart Keys, then the customer will be responsible
for the cost or replacement Smart Keys.
Programming Procedure:
The screen shown above is for demonstrative purposes only and will vary depending on model.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Systems - Smart Key Programming
Information > Page 2747
3. Select PIC for the system, and then the Smart Key Unit.
Press OK.
5. Neutralize all three modules. PIN codes must be entered, (PIN codes can be found on KGIS).
6. Once all three modules have been neutralized, select System to change to PIC System Code
Saving.
8. Insert a NEW Smart Key into the holder in the center armrest as per the on screen prompt.
Press OK
*NOTICE
R03 MIC
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Rear Parking Assist Sensor LH
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Rear Parking Assist Sensor Center LH
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Rear Parking Assist Sensor Center RH
Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Diagrams AUX & USB Jack (Platform Audio)
Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Diagrams AUX Jack (UVO Audio Or With Navigation)
GROUP General
NUMBER 040
This bulletin provides information relating to a limited number of 2011 Sportage (SL) vehicles
equipped with navigation built from the start of production to July 22, 2010 that may exhibit
announcement voice volume that is lower than normal as compared to other modes when pressing
the MAP VOICE BUTTON or the TALK BUTTON in FM/AM mode. To resolve this condition, an
upgrade is available for the Audio/Navigation system via a USB memory stick To properly perform
the software upgrade follow the Service Procedure outlined in the bulletin.
2. Plug the upgrade USB memory stick into the USB port as indicated by the arrow.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > GEN040 > Aug > 10 > Campaign SA050 -
Audio/Navigation Software Upgrade > Page 2786
3. Briefly press "SETUP" button as indicated in step 1 image then touch Main button on the screen.
4. Touch "System Info" button on the screen.
5. Touch "Map Upgrade" button then pop-up dialog box will verify start of update.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > GEN040 > Aug > 10 > Campaign SA050 -
Audio/Navigation Software Upgrade > Page 2787
6. Touch "Yes" button on the screen.
7. Photo shows the upgrade in progress.
When upgrade is completed the screen will flash On then Off (blank screen) Press "POWER"
button to reboot the system.
Make sure the thumb-drive is removed from USB port when upgrade is completed.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: > GEN040 > Aug > 10 > Campaign SA050 -
Audio/Navigation Software Upgrade > Page 2788
REQUIRED PART:
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA050 - Audio/Navigation Software
Upgrade
GROUP General
NUMBER 040
This bulletin provides information relating to a limited number of 2011 Sportage (SL) vehicles
equipped with navigation built from the start of production to July 22, 2010 that may exhibit
announcement voice volume that is lower than normal as compared to other modes when pressing
the MAP VOICE BUTTON or the TALK BUTTON in FM/AM mode. To resolve this condition, an
upgrade is available for the Audio/Navigation system via a USB memory stick To properly perform
the software upgrade follow the Service Procedure outlined in the bulletin.
2. Plug the upgrade USB memory stick into the USB port as indicated by the arrow.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > GEN040 > Aug > 10 >
Campaign SA050 - Audio/Navigation Software Upgrade > Page 2794
3. Briefly press "SETUP" button as indicated in step 1 image then touch Main button on the screen.
4. Touch "System Info" button on the screen.
5. Touch "Map Upgrade" button then pop-up dialog box will verify start of update.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > GEN040 > Aug > 10 >
Campaign SA050 - Audio/Navigation Software Upgrade > Page 2795
6. Touch "Yes" button on the screen.
7. Photo shows the upgrade in progress.
When upgrade is completed the screen will flash On then Off (blank screen) Press "POWER"
button to reboot the system.
Make sure the thumb-drive is removed from USB port when upgrade is completed.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > GEN040 > Aug > 10 >
Campaign SA050 - Audio/Navigation Software Upgrade > Page 2796
REQUIRED PART:
Amplifier: Diagrams
F03-A AMP
F03-C AMP
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio
Receiver > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio - Satellite Audio Reception/Unit Replacement
Radio Receiver: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Satellite Audio Reception/Unit Replacement
Number KT2008122302
Area N.America
- Description
This Pitstop article provides information relating to Sirius(R) satellite audio reception. Some
customers may complain of drop-outs and/or audio reception related to the satellites orbiting and/or
repeater operation.
While Sirius does have an extensive network to ground repeaters (towers that rebroadcast the
satellite signal to help give maximum coverage) in many metropolitan areas, factors such as
microwaves and physical obstruction (Bridges and tunnels) can still temporarily disrupt your radio's
reception. However, this condition is largely held at bay by the four-second buffer created by slight
broadcasting delays between their two satellites orbiting over the continental United States and
their extensive ground network of repeaters.
1. Refer to Kia TSB KT2008071101 for ESN procedure (General Information 023).
2. The dealer will need to call SIRIUS and request an "ESN Swap." In order to do this, please have
the ESN from both the old and new units available.
NOTE:
Radios equipped with SIRIUS Traffic will have two ESNs (one for audio, one for data.)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Door Speaker
Keyless Entry Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit
Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Keyless Entry Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 2833
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Keyless Entry Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 2834
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry
Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
Keyless Entry Module: Recalls Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry
Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 2842
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry
Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 2843
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2845
GROUP General
NUMBER 040
This bulletin provides information relating to a limited number of 2011 Sportage (SL) vehicles
equipped with navigation built from the start of production to July 22, 2010 that may exhibit
announcement voice volume that is lower than normal as compared to other modes when pressing
the MAP VOICE BUTTON or the TALK BUTTON in FM/AM mode. To resolve this condition, an
upgrade is available for the Audio/Navigation system via a USB memory stick To properly perform
the software upgrade follow the Service Procedure outlined in the bulletin.
2. Plug the upgrade USB memory stick into the USB port as indicated by the arrow.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: >
GEN040 > Aug > 10 > Campaign SA050 - Audio/Navigation Software Upgrade > Page 2856
3. Briefly press "SETUP" button as indicated in step 1 image then touch Main button on the screen.
4. Touch "System Info" button on the screen.
5. Touch "Map Upgrade" button then pop-up dialog box will verify start of update.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: >
GEN040 > Aug > 10 > Campaign SA050 - Audio/Navigation Software Upgrade > Page 2857
6. Touch "Yes" button on the screen.
7. Photo shows the upgrade in progress.
When upgrade is completed the screen will flash On then Off (blank screen) Press "POWER"
button to reboot the system.
Make sure the thumb-drive is removed from USB port when upgrade is completed.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Navigation Module: >
GEN040 > Aug > 10 > Campaign SA050 - Audio/Navigation Software Upgrade > Page 2858
REQUIRED PART:
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA050 - Audio/Navigation Software
Upgrade
GROUP General
NUMBER 040
This bulletin provides information relating to a limited number of 2011 Sportage (SL) vehicles
equipped with navigation built from the start of production to July 22, 2010 that may exhibit
announcement voice volume that is lower than normal as compared to other modes when pressing
the MAP VOICE BUTTON or the TALK BUTTON in FM/AM mode. To resolve this condition, an
upgrade is available for the Audio/Navigation system via a USB memory stick To properly perform
the software upgrade follow the Service Procedure outlined in the bulletin.
2. Plug the upgrade USB memory stick into the USB port as indicated by the arrow.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Navigation Module: > GEN040 > Aug > 10 > Campaign SA050 - Audio/Navigation Software Upgrade > Page 2864
3. Briefly press "SETUP" button as indicated in step 1 image then touch Main button on the screen.
4. Touch "System Info" button on the screen.
5. Touch "Map Upgrade" button then pop-up dialog box will verify start of update.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Navigation Module: > GEN040 > Aug > 10 > Campaign SA050 - Audio/Navigation Software Upgrade > Page 2865
6. Touch "Yes" button on the screen.
7. Photo shows the upgrade in progress.
When upgrade is completed the screen will flash On then Off (blank screen) Press "POWER"
button to reboot the system.
Make sure the thumb-drive is removed from USB port when upgrade is completed.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Navigation Module: > GEN040 > Aug > 10 > Campaign SA050 - Audio/Navigation Software Upgrade > Page 2866
REQUIRED PART:
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Rear Parking Assist Sensor Center LH
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Rear Parking Assist Sensor Center RH
M13-A BCM
M13-B BCM
M13-C BCM
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door Exterior Handle > System
Information > Diagrams > Driver Smart Key Outside Handle
Front Door Exterior Handle: Diagrams Driver Smart Key Outside Handle
Front Door Exterior Handle: Diagrams Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle
Number KT2008070101
Area N.America
- Description
This Pitstop article addresses installation of floor mats in all Kia vehicles. Improper floor mat
installation may interfere with proper vehicle operation.
It is not acceptable to layer or place any driver's side floor mat over an existing floor mat as they
are specifically designed to fit individually. This includes additional carpeted floor mats or
rubberized all weather floor mats.
During installation, floor mats must be locked in place using the carpet retension post or carpet
hooks, if so equipped. On vehicles equipped with carpet retension post, the mats must be fully
inserted over the retension post with significant downward pressure to cause a "click" sound to
occur, indicating that the floor mat has properly installed and locked onto the retension post.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Interior - Proper Floor Mat Installation > Page 2924
Customer who purchase floor mats to self-install should be advised at time of purchase of proper
floor mat installation. They should be reminded to remove any previously installed driver's side floor
mat first, and not place any additional floor mat on top of an existing driver's floor mat.
Anytime a customer complaint is alleged that may be attributed to improper floor mat installation
and/or usage, the condition must be noted on the customer repair order and the customer advised
accordingly. Additional, with or without a customer complaint, all improper floor mat installation
and/or usage should be recorded on the repair order, and the customer informed of potential
problems with the operation of the vehicle.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Antenna - Keyless Entry > Component Information >
Diagrams > RF Receiver (With Smart Key)
Keyless Entry Module: Recalls Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R)
Unit Software Update > Page 2944
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R)
Unit Software Update > Page 2945
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign
SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
Keyless Entry Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit
Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign
SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 2953
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign
SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 2954
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2956
Keyless Start Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R)
Unit Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Start Control
Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 2977
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Start Control
Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 2978
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Start Control Module: > BOD070 >
Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
Keyless Start Control Module: Recalls Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Start Control Module: > BOD070 >
Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 2986
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Start Control Module: > BOD070 >
Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 2987
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Keyless Start Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2991
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2993
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2994
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2995
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2996
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2997
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2998
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3000
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3001
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Control
Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3002
Keyless Start Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by SD number (i.e SD130-4, etc.) within these diagrams can
be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be
found via the photo number at the vehicle level under Locations by Photo Number. See:
Locations/Component Locations
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Systems - Smart Key Programming Information
Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Smart Key Programming
Information
GROUP GEN
NUMBER 048
SUBJECT: SMART KEY PROGRAMING PROCEDURES WHEN BOTH SMART KEYS ARE LOST
This bulletin provides programming information for vehicles for which both Smart Keys are missing
Without a Smart Key the vehicle will not power up Please follow the programming procedure
outlined in this bulletin when replacing both Smart Keys.
*NOTICE
If it is determined that a customer has lost both Smart Keys, then the customer will be responsible
for the cost or replacement Smart Keys.
Programming Procedure:
The screen shown above is for demonstrative purposes only and will vary depending on model.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Systems - Smart Key Programming Information > Page
3010
3. Select PIC for the system, and then the Smart Key Unit.
Press OK.
5. Neutralize all three modules. PIN codes must be entered, (PIN codes can be found on KGIS).
6. Once all three modules have been neutralized, select System to change to PIC System Code
Saving.
8. Insert a NEW Smart Key into the holder in the center armrest as per the on screen prompt.
Press OK
*NOTICE
GROUP GEN
NUMBER 048
SUBJECT: SMART KEY PROGRAMING PROCEDURES WHEN BOTH SMART KEYS ARE LOST
This bulletin provides programming information for vehicles for which both Smart Keys are missing
Without a Smart Key the vehicle will not power up Please follow the programming procedure
outlined in this bulletin when replacing both Smart Keys.
*NOTICE
If it is determined that a customer has lost both Smart Keys, then the customer will be responsible
for the cost or replacement Smart Keys.
Programming Procedure:
The screen shown above is for demonstrative purposes only and will vary depending on model.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Systems - Smart Key Programming Information > Page 3016
3. Select PIC for the system, and then the Smart Key Unit.
Press OK.
5. Neutralize all three modules. PIN codes must be entered, (PIN codes can be found on KGIS).
6. Once all three modules have been neutralized, select System to change to PIC System Code
Saving.
8. Insert a NEW Smart Key into the holder in the center armrest as per the on screen prompt.
Press OK
*NOTICE
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3038
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3040
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3041
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3042
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3043
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3044
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3045
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3047
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3048
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations
Keyless Entry Module: Recalls Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 -
Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 3063
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Keyless Entry Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10 > Campaign SA052 -
Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 3064
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10
> Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update
Keyless Entry Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit
Software Update
GROUP BODY
NUMBER 070
SUBJECT: SERVICE ACTION: SMART KEY UNIT UPDATE - CHANGE OF SMK SOFTWARE
(SA052)
This bulletin provides information relating to a Smart Key Unit software upgrade of some 2011 MY
SPORTAGE (SL) vehicles produced from start of production to June 7, 2010 Smart Key equipped
Sportage vehicles built prior to that date may experience battery discharge due to parasitic draw
(approx 220mA max) because of improper SMK unit "Sleep"/"Wake Up" switching.
To correct this condition, the ECU should be reprogrammed using the GDS download as described
in this bulletin.
NOTICE:
A Service Action is a repair program without customer notification that is performed during the
warranty period. Any dealer request to perform this repair outside the warranty period will require
DPSM approval.
Repair status for a VIN is provided on WebDCS (Service > Warranty Coverage > Warranty
Coverage Inquiry > Campaign Information). Not Completed Recall/Service Action reports are
available on WebDCS (Consumer Affairs > No5t Completed Recall Recall VIN > Select Report).
NOTICE:
^ A fully charged battery is necessary before ECU upgrade can take place. DO NOT connect a
battery charger to the vehicle during ECU upgrade.
^ Turn off all lamps (do not leave head lamp switch in auto mode) and all accessories (including
heater, A/C, blower, radio, seat warmer, defroster, etc.)
^ Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during upgrade.
*NOTICE
If attempting to perform the ECU upgrade with the power supply cable disconnected from the GDS
tool, be sure to check that the GDS tool is fully charged before ECU upgrade. If the GDS tool is not
fully charged, failure to perform the ECU upgrade may occur. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the power supply connector be connected to the GDS tool.
2. Connect the USB cable between the VCI and the GDS tool.
*NOTICE
When performing the ECU upgrade using the GDS tool, wireless communication between the VCI
and GDS tool is not available. Therefore, be sure to connect the USB cable between the VCI and
the GDS tool.
3. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC Gable (GHDM - 241000) to the VCI.
4. Connect the Main 16-pin DLC cable (GHDM - 241000) to the OBD-II connector, located under
the driver's side of the instrument panel.
5. Turn on the VCI and diagnostic terminal with the ignition key in the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
Enter the vehicle information by pressing the Auto VIN button, entering the vehicle's VIN or
selecting the vehicle model, model year, engine/fuel type and PIC as the system, and then click
OK.
Select ECU Upgrade on the initial screen after entering the vehicle information; then select Auto
Mode then PIC in the left ECU Upgrade column.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10
> Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 3072
7. Click OK on the screen; then insert the FOB into FOB holder.
8. Read information; then click OK.
The GDS will read the vehicles ROM ID After the Current ROM ID is displayed select appropriate
Upgrade Event, "137.11MY SL SMK S/W UPDATE."
Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
10. Smart key must be re-registered after ECU reprogramming otherwise engine will not start.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Module: > BOD070 > Sep > 10
> Campaign SA052 - Smart Key(R) Unit Software Update > Page 3073
2. Enter the password from the table below; then click OK.
Do NOT perform Manual Mode ECU upgrade unless Auto Mode fails.
Do NOT Force the Calibration into the Incorrect P/N ECU This is subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Upgrade will begin and the progress of the upgrade will appear on the bar graph.
^ Smart key must be registered after ECU reprogramming, otherwise engine will not start.
^ Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes using the GDS and erase any stored DTCs.
*NOTICE
VIN Inquiry data for this repair is provided for tracking purposes only Kia retailers should reference
SA052 when accessing the WebDCS system.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3075
Head Restraint System: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat/Seat Cover/Seat Belt
Modification Info.
GROUP GEN
NUMBER 050
Kia Dealers may receive inquiries from customers about aftermarket seat covers re-upholstering
seats and/or questions related to modifications of seats seat covers seat belts etc. To assist
dealers in responding properly to these inquires Kia is providing the following information:
Kia's current Owners Manuals contain a number of very specific Instructions Cautions and
Warnings in Section 3; Safety Features Of Your Vehicle. The pages of that section provide
information about the use and care of Seat Belts and components of the Secondary Restraint
System (SRS); Air Bags Side Air Bags and Occupant Detection Systems (ODS). Note that the
Owner's Manuals include the following statement:
The Owner's Manuals contain specific warnings against making any modifications to the SRS, Air
Bags/Side Air Bags or related systems or structures. Additionally the Owner's Manual specifically
cautions against the use of seat covers, after market seat heaters etc. and informs how their use
may influence the operation of the Air Bag/Side Air Bag or ODS systems.
Should customers inquire about the possible installation of seat covers, aftermarket (re)upholstery
or otherwise request information about making any changes or modifications to the restraint
systems, please refer them to Section 3 of the Owner's Manual and review the appropriate
paragraphs with them.
Sample page excerpts from 2011 MY Optima shown below; other models are similar.
For complete information and full details always refer to the appropriate Owner's Manual.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Lumbar Support Motor
Seat Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat/Seat Cover/Seat Belt Modification Info.
GROUP GEN
NUMBER 050
Kia Dealers may receive inquiries from customers about aftermarket seat covers re-upholstering
seats and/or questions related to modifications of seats seat covers seat belts etc. To assist
dealers in responding properly to these inquires Kia is providing the following information:
Kia's current Owners Manuals contain a number of very specific Instructions Cautions and
Warnings in Section 3; Safety Features Of Your Vehicle. The pages of that section provide
information about the use and care of Seat Belts and components of the Secondary Restraint
System (SRS); Air Bags Side Air Bags and Occupant Detection Systems (ODS). Note that the
Owner's Manuals include the following statement:
The Owner's Manuals contain specific warnings against making any modifications to the SRS, Air
Bags/Side Air Bags or related systems or structures. Additionally the Owner's Manual specifically
cautions against the use of seat covers, after market seat heaters etc. and informs how their use
may influence the operation of the Air Bag/Side Air Bag or ODS systems.
Should customers inquire about the possible installation of seat covers, aftermarket (re)upholstery
or otherwise request information about making any changes or modifications to the restraint
systems, please refer them to Section 3 of the Owner's Manual and review the appropriate
paragraphs with them.
Sample page excerpts from 2011 MY Optima shown below; other models are similar.
For complete information and full details always refer to the appropriate Owner's Manual.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Seat Fan: Diagram Information and Instructions
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3143
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3145
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3146
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3147
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3148
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3149
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3150
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3152
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3153
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Fan Switch > Component Information > Locations
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3162
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3164
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3165
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3166
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3167
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3168
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3169
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3171
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3172
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3173
Seat Heater: Connector Views
Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be
found via the photo number at the vehicle level under Locations by Photo Number. See:
Locations/Component Locations
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by SD number (i.e SD130-4, etc.) within these diagrams can
be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be
found via the photo number at the vehicle level under Locations by Photo Number. See:
Locations/Component Locations
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3178
Seat Warmer
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by SD number (i.e SD130-4, etc.) within these diagrams can
be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3179
Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be
found via the photo number at the vehicle level under Locations by Photo Number. See:
Locations/Component Locations
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3256
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3258
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3259
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3260
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3261
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3262
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3263
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3265
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3266
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3267
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3272
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3274
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3275
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3276
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3277
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3278
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3279
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3281
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3282
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Driver Door Switch
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3303
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3305
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3306
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3307
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3308
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3309
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3310
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3312
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3313
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3314
Instrument Cluster / Carrier: Connector Views
Instrument Cluster
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by SD number (i.e SD130-4, etc.) within these diagrams can
be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be
found via the photo number at the vehicle level under Locations by Photo Number. See:
Locations/Component Locations
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitoring System - Low Pressure Warning Lamp On
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitoring System - Low Pressure
Warning Lamp On
Number KT2009021301
Area N.America
- Description
A recent review of warranty claim data has indicated that many dealers are writing repair orders
and entering unnecessary claims related to normal TPMS system operation. The Tire Pressure
Monitoring System was developed as an important safety feature to alert customers to low air
pressure in one or more of their tires, prompting them to check and adjust their tire pressure at the
nearest service station or other similar facility. Occasionally, due to a customer's lack of familiarity
with the TPMS system and a conditioned response to bring the vehicle in to their serviceing dealer
for any warning lamp concern, you may be presented with a vehicle which has the Tread Lamp
illuminated due to low tire pressure on a normally operating TPMS system. Service advisers and
other dealership personal should screen for all such types of customer complaints and not begin
writing a repair order due to a low tire pressure warning lamp (Tread Lamp) in the absence of any
TPMS Malfunction Indicator Lamp (TPMS Lamp) illuminated. Assist the customer in checking and
adding air to the tires as necessary during their first visit for the low air pressure light on and
provide them with a copy of the tri-fold Kia TPMS Brochure P/N UN050-KU-001.
A warranty claim should not be filed for any complaint related to low tire pressure and may result in
a debit being applied to your dealership during the normal claims review process.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information >
Diagrams
Odometer: Diagrams
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type) > Page 3336
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Brake Switch (Hand Type)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Foot Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type)
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Foot Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type)
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Hand Parking Brake Switch (Hand Type)
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type) > Page 3361
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Parking Brake Switch (Hand Type)
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Foot Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type)
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Foot Parking Brake Switch (Foot Type)
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Hand Parking Brake Switch (Hand Type)
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitoring System - Low Pressure
Warning Lamp On
Number KT2009021301
Area N.America
- Description
A recent review of warranty claim data has indicated that many dealers are writing repair orders
and entering unnecessary claims related to normal TPMS system operation. The Tire Pressure
Monitoring System was developed as an important safety feature to alert customers to low air
pressure in one or more of their tires, prompting them to check and adjust their tire pressure at the
nearest service station or other similar facility. Occasionally, due to a customer's lack of familiarity
with the TPMS system and a conditioned response to bring the vehicle in to their serviceing dealer
for any warning lamp concern, you may be presented with a vehicle which has the Tread Lamp
illuminated due to low tire pressure on a normally operating TPMS system. Service advisers and
other dealership personal should screen for all such types of customer complaints and not begin
writing a repair order due to a low tire pressure warning lamp (Tread Lamp) in the absence of any
TPMS Malfunction Indicator Lamp (TPMS Lamp) illuminated. Assist the customer in checking and
adding air to the tires as necessary during their first visit for the low air pressure light on and
provide them with a copy of the tri-fold Kia TPMS Brochure P/N UN050-KU-001.
A warranty claim should not be filed for any complaint related to low tire pressure and may result in
a debit being applied to your dealership during the normal claims review process.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Module > Component Information > Locations
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line
TPMS
Number KT2008092302
Area N.America
- Description
Diagnosing TRW/Lear Low Line Tire Pressure Monitoring warning light ON conditions with certain
Diagnostic Trouble Codes stored in Memory requires particular attention. The following procedure
can assist in proper diagnosis for the wheel sensor concerns.
^ Install TPMS tool to diagnose DTC's, retrieve DTC C1313, C1312, etc.
^ Using the worksheet record sensor ID for all Four (4) Sensors from the "Current data" Screen.
^ Ping each wheel and record these sensor ID's on the worksheet.
^ Match wheel sensor ID, against the ID recorded from the exciter tool/ECU. The missing sensor ID
should be checked for correct setting and battery
DO NOT replace or diagnose components in a position based on the DTC information. Always
locate the sensor ID on the vehicle with the hand-tool. A commen mistake is Code C1312 is set
and the technical replaces that sensor thinking it was in the left Front, the wheel and tire may be
located in the Right Rear. When and it the tires are rotated the original configuration is no longer
valid.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line TPMS > Page
3378
TPMS Wheel Sensor Worksheet
^ If the Lamp shown above is ON: Check tire pressure and check for causes of low pressure.
^ Verify wheel sensor ID's in the ECU module corresponds to all 4 sensors on the vehicle - if not,
reprogram the sensors on the vehicle into the ECU
module.
^ Verify that the ECU module and all 4 wheel sensors have the mode and state configured correctly
- if not, correct this condition first. - This applies to
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line TPMS > Page
3379
^ Excessive aftermarket wiring tie-wrapped and coiled on or near TPMS module. This may create a
magnetic field causing concern.
^ If all wheel sensor ID's, Mode and State are correct as initially received and you cannot identify
any interfearence as listed above and the problem
Wheel sensor to ECU communication takes place every 3 minutes, 20 seconds for TRW systems
and every 3 minutes for Lear systems unless rapid tire deflation is occuring. Be sure to wait this
amount of time for the values to populate on the Current Data Screen.
ROAD TEST:
To verify your repair drive the vehicle at or above 20 MPH for 20 minutes, if speed goes below 20
MPH during Auto-Learn (TRW only), the process is halted until speed is above threshold again.
Auto-Learn (TRW only), is not recommended, use exciter tool each time to program the sensor ID's
into the receiver module.
The warning light shown above = indicates Low tire pressure problem, use exciter tool and match
tire pressure on-screen value against your tire pressure gauge reading. The tire pressures should
be set COLD.
The warning light shown above = indicates a problem with the Wheel sensors, TPMS module, radio
frequency interfearence or related wiring. Use Exciter too to diagnose.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - Diagnosing Low Line TPMS > Page
3381
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Outside Radio Signals
Affects TPMS
Number KT2008092201
Area N.America
- Description
KMA has received several inquires reguarding TPMS light ON with or without Stored Diagnostic
Trouble Codes in Memory. The following listed components/conditions may cause the control unit
and wheel sensor communication to be interrupted and may cause multiple DTC's.
NOTE:
Always use the correct part for the proper model year and production range, failure to do so may
result in vehicles which are difficult to repair and can be subject to warranty chargeback.
^ Excessive aftermarket wiring tie-wrapped and coiled on or near TPMS module. This may create a
magnetic field causing concern.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Brake Light Bulb: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Improved Rear Combination Bulb Life
Number KT2008082201
Area N.America
- Description
Bulbs can be identified by the markings on the base of the bulb: 18644 28088N (old part
number)/Bulb base markings: KHA12V28/8W2357637. 18644 28088L (Long Life) Bulb base
markings KHA12V28/8W2357LL637 ("LL" is designated as long life bulb).
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3408
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3410
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3411
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3412
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3413
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3414
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3415
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3417
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3418
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3419
Cargo Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by SD number (i.e SD130-4, etc.) within these diagrams can
be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be
found via the photo number at the vehicle level under Locations by Photo Number. See:
Locations/Component Locations
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3455
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3457
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3458
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3459
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3460
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3461
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3462
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3464
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3465
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3466
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information
> Locations > Page 3472
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3489
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3491
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3492
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3493
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3494
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3495
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3496
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3498
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3499
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3500
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by SD number (i.e SD130-4, etc.) within these diagrams can
be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be
found via the photo number at the vehicle level under Locations by Photo Number. See:
Locations/Component Locations
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams
Schematic Diagrams
INTRODUCTION
- Each page is consisted of circuits by system. This schematic diagram includes the path of
electricity flow, connection condition for each switch, and the function of other relevant circuits at
once. It is applicable to real service work.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3515
- It is very important to understand relevant circuits exactly before troubleshooting diagnosis.
- Circuits by system depends upon part number and are indicated on schematic diagram index.
Figure of the front view of the connector (harness side, not component side)
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (-).
i. When connecting the harness with connector between harnesses, it shows female and male
connectors.
ii. Each terminal on the connector is numbered in accordance with (4) Connector View And
Numbering Order. iii. Not connected terminal is marked with a dash (*).
5. Component Locations
- To find the components easily, a components locations diagram is indicated with "PHOTO NO" on
the lower portion of the component name.
- To make it easy to distinguish connectors, the connector in the picture is indicated being installed
in the vehicle.
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3517
7. Harness Classification
Electrical wiring connectors are classified according to the wiring parts in the Harness Layouts.
8. Connector Identification
For example:
NOTE: Connectors which connect each wiring harness are represented by the following symbols.
For example:
A junction block identification symbol consists of a wiring harness location classification symbol
corresponding to a wiring harness location and number corresponding to the connector in the
junction block.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3518
For example:
HARNESS LAYOUTS
Harness layouts show the routing of the major wiring harnesses, the in-line connectors and the
splices between the major harnesses. These layouts will make electrical troubleshooting easier.
Symbols
SYMBOLS
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3519
Symbols Part 1
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3520
Symbols Part 2
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3521
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer's
complaints. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down
the probable causes.
Locate the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power source through the system components to ground. If you
do not understand how the circuit should work, read the circuit operation text. Also check other
circuits that share with the problem circuit. The name of circuits that share the same fuse, ground,
or switch, for example, are referred to on each diagram. Try to operate any shared circuits you did
not check in step 1. If the shared circuit works, the shared wiring is okay, and the cause must be
within the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse
or ground is a likely cause.
Make a circuit test to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Remember that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Narrow down the probable causes using the
troubleshooting hints and system diagnosis charts. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try
to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Repeat the system check to be sure you have repaired the problem. If the problem was a blown
fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
Use a test lamp or a voltmeter on circuits without solid state units and use a test lamp to check for
voltage. A test lamp is made up of a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding
one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present.
When the bulb goes on, there is voltage at the point being tested.
CAUTION: A number of circuits include solid-state modules, such as the Engine Control
Module(ECM), used with computer command control injection. Voltage in these circuits should be
tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test lamp on
circuits that contain solid state modules. Damage to the modules may result.
A voltmeter can be used in place of a test lamp. While a test lamp shows whether the voltage is
present or not, a voltmeter indicates how much voltage is present.
Use a self-powered test lamp or an ohmmeter to check for continuity. The ohmmeter shows how
much resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
CAUTION: Never use a sell-powered test lamp on circuits that contain solid state modules.
Damage to these modules may result.
An ohmmeter can be used in place of a self-powered test lamp. The ohmmeter shows how much
resistance there is between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3522
Circuits which include any solid-state devices should be tested only with a 10-megaohm or higher
impedance digital multimeter. When measuring resistance with a digital multimeter, the battery
negative terminal should be disconnected. Otherwise, there may be incorrect readings. Diodes and
solid-state devices in a circuit can make an ohmmeter give a false reading. To find out if a
component is affecting a measurement, take one reading, reverse the leads and take a second
reading. If different the solid-state device is affecting the measurement.
CAUTION: Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the specified fuse that protects the circuit
being tested. Do not use this tool in any situation to substitute an input or output at the solid-state
control module, such as ECM, TCM, etc.
SHORT FINDER
A short finder is available to locate a short to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic
field in the shorted circuit and shows you the location of the short through body trim or sheet metal.
TROUBLESHOOTING TEST
This test measures voltage in a circuit. When testing for voltage at a connector, you do not have to
separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back(backprobe).
Always check both sides of the connector because dirt and corrosion between its contact surfaces
can cause electrical problems.
A. Connect one lead of a test lamp or voltmeter to a ground. If you are using a voltmeter, be sure it
is the voltmeter's negative test lead you have
connected to ground.
B. Connect the other lead of the test lamp or voltmeter to a selected test point(connector or
terminal). C. If the test lamp glows, there is voltage present. If you are using a voltmeter, note the
voltage reading. A loss of more than 1 volt from
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or
ohmmeter to one end of the part of the circuit you wish to lest. If you are using an ohmmeter,
hold the leads together and adjust the ohmmeter to read zero ohms.
C. Connect the other lead to the other end. D. If the self-power test lamp glows, there is continuity.
If you are using an ohmmeter, low or zero resistance means good continuity.
A. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. B. Connect one lead of a self-powered test lamp or an
ohmmeter to the fuse terminal on the load side. C. Connect the other lead to a ground. D.
Beginning near the fuse block move the harness from side to side. Continue this procedure (about
six inches apart) while watching the
E. When the self-powered test lamp glows, or ohmmeter registers, there is a short to a ground in
the wiring near that point.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3524
A. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. B. Connect the short finder across the
fuse terminals. C. Close all switches in series in the circuit that is being testing. D. Turn on the
short circuit locator. It sends pulses of current to the short. This creates a pulsing magnetic field
around the wiring between the
E. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will
show current pulses through sheet metal and
body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each
current pulse. Once the meter is moved past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving.
Check around this area to locate the cause of the short circuit.
This test checks for voltage drop along a wire, or through a connection or switch.
A. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or
switch) closest to the battery. B. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire.
C. operate the circuit. D. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points.
A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits), may indicate a problem. Check
the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3525
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3526
Parking Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by SD number (i.e SD130-4, etc.) within these diagrams can
be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be
found via the photo number at the vehicle level under Locations by Photo Number. See:
Locations/Component Locations
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Brake Lamp Relay: Locations
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3584
Tail Light Bulb: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Improved Rear Combination Bulb Life
Number KT2008082201
Area N.America
- Description
Bulbs can be identified by the markings on the base of the bulb: 18644 28088N (old part
number)/Bulb base markings: KHA12V28/8W2357637. 18644 28088L (Long Life) Bulb base
markings KHA12V28/8W2357LL637 ("LL" is designated as long life bulb).
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams
Power Window Switch: Recalls Campaign - Driver's Power Window Switch Replacement
GROUP Service Campaign
NUMBER SC086
This bulletin provides information relating to some LX Sportage vehicles equipped with "Auto
Down" function and produced from the start of production through October 27, 2010. In affected
vehicles the window may not raise or lower even though the power window switch is actuated. To
correct this condition and improve customer satisfaction Kia is launching this Service Campaign
and replacing the power window switch module assembly on all affected 2011 Sportage vehicles
that fall within the vehicle production range Kia is requesting the completion of this Service
Campaign on all affected 2011 MY Sportage vehicles in dealer stock prior to retail sales.
*NOTICE
WebDCS must be checked to confirm that SC086 has not been previously done on any vehicle
without a campaign completion label. WebDCS > Warranty Coverage > Warranty Coverage Inquiry
> Check Open Campaign Status
To assure complete customer satisfaction remember to check for any additional open campaigns
before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Inspection Procedure:
Open the hood and check for SC086 campaign completion label above the drivers side fuse box If
label exists NO FURTHER ACTION IS REQUIRED
If label does not exist continue to step one (1) of Service Procedure outlined below.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Window Switch: > SC086 > Nov > 10 >
Campaign - Driver's Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 3650
Service Procedure:
1. Remove the drivers door quadrant interior cover (A).
Remove the interior handle cover (B), and then the three (3) door trim mounting screws including
the screw.
*NOTICE
The locations of the screws are indicated by the larger arrows, including the screw behind the
interior handle cover (B).
2. Disconnect the interior handle cage; then disconnect tweeter speaker and power window
connector from the door trim; then remove the door trim.
3. Remove the six (6) power window switch mounting screws (circles), and then remove the power
window switch module assembly from the door trim as shown in the photo.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Window Switch: > SC086 > Nov > 10 >
Campaign - Driver's Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 3651
4. Unsnap the locking tabs that secure the power window switch module assembly (C) to the power
window switch case (D), and then separate the module assembly from the case.
5. Replace the power window switch module assembly (C) with an new improved assembly into
switch case (D)
Test power window switch operation several times before releasing vehicle.
6. Attach campaign completion label above the driver's side fuse box.
REQUIRED PARTS
*NOTICE
*NOTICE
WebDCS must be checked to confirm that SC086 has not been previously performed on any
vehicle without a campaign completion label. WebDCS > Warranty Coverage > Warranty Coverage
Inquiry > Check Open Campaign Status
To assure complete customer satisfaction, remember to check for any additional open campaigns
before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Window Switch: > SC086
> Nov > 10 > Campaign - Driver's Power Window Switch Replacement
Power Window Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Driver's Power Window Switch
Replacement
GROUP Service Campaign
NUMBER SC086
This bulletin provides information relating to some LX Sportage vehicles equipped with "Auto
Down" function and produced from the start of production through October 27, 2010. In affected
vehicles the window may not raise or lower even though the power window switch is actuated. To
correct this condition and improve customer satisfaction Kia is launching this Service Campaign
and replacing the power window switch module assembly on all affected 2011 Sportage vehicles
that fall within the vehicle production range Kia is requesting the completion of this Service
Campaign on all affected 2011 MY Sportage vehicles in dealer stock prior to retail sales.
*NOTICE
WebDCS must be checked to confirm that SC086 has not been previously done on any vehicle
without a campaign completion label. WebDCS > Warranty Coverage > Warranty Coverage Inquiry
> Check Open Campaign Status
To assure complete customer satisfaction remember to check for any additional open campaigns
before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Inspection Procedure:
Open the hood and check for SC086 campaign completion label above the drivers side fuse box If
label exists NO FURTHER ACTION IS REQUIRED
If label does not exist continue to step one (1) of Service Procedure outlined below.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Window Switch: > SC086
> Nov > 10 > Campaign - Driver's Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 3658
Service Procedure:
1. Remove the drivers door quadrant interior cover (A).
Remove the interior handle cover (B), and then the three (3) door trim mounting screws including
the screw.
*NOTICE
The locations of the screws are indicated by the larger arrows, including the screw behind the
interior handle cover (B).
2. Disconnect the interior handle cage; then disconnect tweeter speaker and power window
connector from the door trim; then remove the door trim.
3. Remove the six (6) power window switch mounting screws (circles), and then remove the power
window switch module assembly from the door trim as shown in the photo.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Window Switch: > SC086
> Nov > 10 > Campaign - Driver's Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 3659
4. Unsnap the locking tabs that secure the power window switch module assembly (C) to the power
window switch case (D), and then separate the module assembly from the case.
5. Replace the power window switch module assembly (C) with an new improved assembly into
switch case (D)
Test power window switch operation several times before releasing vehicle.
6. Attach campaign completion label above the driver's side fuse box.
REQUIRED PARTS
*NOTICE
*NOTICE
WebDCS must be checked to confirm that SC086 has not been previously performed on any
vehicle without a campaign completion label. WebDCS > Warranty Coverage > Warranty Coverage
Inquiry > Check Open Campaign Status
To assure complete customer satisfaction, remember to check for any additional open campaigns
before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Power Window Main Switch
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Passenger Power Window Switch (W/O Central Door Lock)
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Passenger Power Window Switch (With Central Door Lock)
Power Window Motor: Diagrams Driver Safety Power Window Module (With Safety)
Power Window Switch: Recalls Campaign - Driver's Power Window Switch Replacement
GROUP Service Campaign
NUMBER SC086
This bulletin provides information relating to some LX Sportage vehicles equipped with "Auto
Down" function and produced from the start of production through October 27, 2010. In affected
vehicles the window may not raise or lower even though the power window switch is actuated. To
correct this condition and improve customer satisfaction Kia is launching this Service Campaign
and replacing the power window switch module assembly on all affected 2011 Sportage vehicles
that fall within the vehicle production range Kia is requesting the completion of this Service
Campaign on all affected 2011 MY Sportage vehicles in dealer stock prior to retail sales.
*NOTICE
WebDCS must be checked to confirm that SC086 has not been previously done on any vehicle
without a campaign completion label. WebDCS > Warranty Coverage > Warranty Coverage Inquiry
> Check Open Campaign Status
To assure complete customer satisfaction remember to check for any additional open campaigns
before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Inspection Procedure:
Open the hood and check for SC086 campaign completion label above the drivers side fuse box If
label exists NO FURTHER ACTION IS REQUIRED
If label does not exist continue to step one (1) of Service Procedure outlined below.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Window Switch: > SC086 > Nov > 10 > Campaign - Driver's Power Window Switch
Replacement > Page 3698
Service Procedure:
1. Remove the drivers door quadrant interior cover (A).
Remove the interior handle cover (B), and then the three (3) door trim mounting screws including
the screw.
*NOTICE
The locations of the screws are indicated by the larger arrows, including the screw behind the
interior handle cover (B).
2. Disconnect the interior handle cage; then disconnect tweeter speaker and power window
connector from the door trim; then remove the door trim.
3. Remove the six (6) power window switch mounting screws (circles), and then remove the power
window switch module assembly from the door trim as shown in the photo.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Window Switch: > SC086 > Nov > 10 > Campaign - Driver's Power Window Switch
Replacement > Page 3699
4. Unsnap the locking tabs that secure the power window switch module assembly (C) to the power
window switch case (D), and then separate the module assembly from the case.
5. Replace the power window switch module assembly (C) with an new improved assembly into
switch case (D)
Test power window switch operation several times before releasing vehicle.
6. Attach campaign completion label above the driver's side fuse box.
REQUIRED PARTS
*NOTICE
*NOTICE
WebDCS must be checked to confirm that SC086 has not been previously performed on any
vehicle without a campaign completion label. WebDCS > Warranty Coverage > Warranty Coverage
Inquiry > Check Open Campaign Status
To assure complete customer satisfaction, remember to check for any additional open campaigns
before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Window Switch: > SC086 > Nov > 10 > Campaign - Driver's
Power Window Switch Replacement
Power Window Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Driver's Power Window Switch
Replacement
GROUP Service Campaign
NUMBER SC086
This bulletin provides information relating to some LX Sportage vehicles equipped with "Auto
Down" function and produced from the start of production through October 27, 2010. In affected
vehicles the window may not raise or lower even though the power window switch is actuated. To
correct this condition and improve customer satisfaction Kia is launching this Service Campaign
and replacing the power window switch module assembly on all affected 2011 Sportage vehicles
that fall within the vehicle production range Kia is requesting the completion of this Service
Campaign on all affected 2011 MY Sportage vehicles in dealer stock prior to retail sales.
*NOTICE
WebDCS must be checked to confirm that SC086 has not been previously done on any vehicle
without a campaign completion label. WebDCS > Warranty Coverage > Warranty Coverage Inquiry
> Check Open Campaign Status
To assure complete customer satisfaction remember to check for any additional open campaigns
before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Inspection Procedure:
Open the hood and check for SC086 campaign completion label above the drivers side fuse box If
label exists NO FURTHER ACTION IS REQUIRED
If label does not exist continue to step one (1) of Service Procedure outlined below.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Window Switch: > SC086 > Nov > 10 > Campaign - Driver's
Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 3706
Service Procedure:
1. Remove the drivers door quadrant interior cover (A).
Remove the interior handle cover (B), and then the three (3) door trim mounting screws including
the screw.
*NOTICE
The locations of the screws are indicated by the larger arrows, including the screw behind the
interior handle cover (B).
2. Disconnect the interior handle cage; then disconnect tweeter speaker and power window
connector from the door trim; then remove the door trim.
3. Remove the six (6) power window switch mounting screws (circles), and then remove the power
window switch module assembly from the door trim as shown in the photo.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Window Switch: > SC086 > Nov > 10 > Campaign - Driver's
Power Window Switch Replacement > Page 3707
4. Unsnap the locking tabs that secure the power window switch module assembly (C) to the power
window switch case (D), and then separate the module assembly from the case.
5. Replace the power window switch module assembly (C) with an new improved assembly into
switch case (D)
Test power window switch operation several times before releasing vehicle.
6. Attach campaign completion label above the driver's side fuse box.
REQUIRED PARTS
*NOTICE
*NOTICE
WebDCS must be checked to confirm that SC086 has not been previously performed on any
vehicle without a campaign completion label. WebDCS > Warranty Coverage > Warranty Coverage
Inquiry > Check Open Campaign Status
To assure complete customer satisfaction, remember to check for any additional open campaigns
before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Kia Sportage 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.4L (2011))
Kia Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Power Window Main Switch
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Passenger Power Window Switch (W/O Central Door Lock)
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Passenger Power Window Switch (With Central Door Lock)